JP2020110345A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a technology for executing various types of performance associated with settings.SOLUTION: A performance control unit 210 receives a demonstration performance command (S600 in Fig.56); when a lottery trigger for setting suggestion performance is matched (S800:Yes), narrows down candidate data on a lottery vertical axis on the basis of the present situation and generates a lottery vertical axis (S802) before executing a performance lottery of the setting suggestion performance (S804); and, on the basis of a result of the performance lottery, instructs respective performance devices (S806). In determining the present situation on the basis of setting history data at the time of generating the lottery vertical axis, a history of a setting value on which no actual use is recorded is neglected, which enables execution of the setting suggestion performance based on actual use of a pachinko machine 1. A plurality of types of modes are set in association with the setting suggestion performance and, depending on the modes, weighting, frequency of appearance, and reliability for types of the setting suggestion performance are different, which enables execution of various types of performance and addition of pleasure of presuming a meaning of an individual setting suggestion element.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 57

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that executes a lottery during a game.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, as this type of gaming machine, there is known a gaming machine having a function of changing a setting relating to a probability of winning in a lottery (probability of winning). For example, the setting value at the time of changing or confirming the setting and the date and time data of the real-time clock for time management are associated with each other and stored in the backup memory as the setting change confirmation history information and set via the hall menu. A pachi-slot machine that displays the setting change confirmation history information stored in the backup memory when access to the change/confirmation history submenu is requested and the prescribed authentication operation is correctly performed (for example, the password is entered). (Rotating type game machine) is known (for example, refer to Patent Document 1).

JP, 2018-114091, A

According to the above-mentioned prior art, since only the person who has the authority to change and confirm the setting can display the setting change confirmation history information, while suppressing the risk that the setting value is known to the unauthorized person, It is considered that a person who has can judge whether or not an unnatural operation regarding the set value is performed.

However, the history information is stored so that it can be displayed by a person who has the authority to change and confirm the settings, and since the history information is not reflected in the game at all, the player is currently playing the game. It is difficult to experience whether or not the setting change function is being utilized in the gaming machine, and even if the function is installed, there is a sense of distrust that the setting may actually be maintained at a low setting. There is a risk of having it. The above-mentioned prior art is an example of a pachi-slot machine, but the same can be said for a pachinko machine.

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a technique for executing various effects related to setting.

The present invention adopts the following means for solving the above problems. The words in the following parentheses are merely examples, and the present invention is not limited to these. Further, the present invention can be an invention including at least one item for specifying each invention shown in the following solving means. Further, each invention specifying matter shown in the following solution means can be subordinated by adding an element limiting the invention specifying matter, or can be deleted by making a superordinate concept an element limiting the invention specifying matter. ..

Solving means 1: The gaming machine of the present solving means suggests a setting changing means capable of changing a setting relating to a winning probability of a predetermined lottery executed during a game to any one of a plurality of types, and a content indicating the setting. A first setting suggesting effect executing means capable of executing one setting suggesting effect, and a second setting suggesting effect executing means capable of executing a second setting suggesting effect that suggests a content different from the first setting suggesting effect with respect to the setting. , Controlling the execution of the first setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect, and the first setting suggestion effect in a first state which is a predetermined state related to the game and a second state different from the first state, And a setting suggestion effect execution control means for changing the execution frequency of the second setting suggestion effect.

In the gaming machine of the present solving means, for example, the game proceeds in the following flow.
(1) When a game ball is launched, it flows down in the game area while being guided by obstacle nails, windmills, structures, etc., passing through some area in the process and entering various entrances. To do. When the game ball passes/enters the starting area (starting gate, starting winning opening), a lottery trigger is generated.

(2) When a lottery trigger occurs during the game (when the game ball enters the starting winning opening), a predetermined lottery (special symbol lottery) is executed.

(3) The setting related to the winning probability of the predetermined lottery in the above (2) is set to any one of a plurality of types (for example, 6 stages) and can be changed.

(4) During the game, the first setting suggesting effect that suggests the contents regarding the setting of (3) can be executed.

(5) Further, during the game, a second setting suggestive effect that suggests a content different from the first setting suggestive effect of the above (4) with respect to the setting of the above (3) can be executed.

(6) The execution of the first setting suggestion effect of the above (4) and the second setting suggestion effect of the above (5) is controlled according to the state of the game. Then, the first setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect are executed at different frequencies in the first state which is a predetermined state relating to the game and the second state which is different from the first state.

In a gaming machine equipped with a function for changing the setting related to the winning probability in the lottery, an effect suggesting the current setting (whether it is a high setting or a low setting) may be performed. By executing such a setting suggestion effect, the player can be made aware of whether or not the table currently being played is an advantageous table for the player. Then, by suggesting that the setting is high, it becomes possible to make the player have a sense of expectation and to be motivated to continue the game for a long time.

However, when the setting suggestion effect is executed only in a specific scene during the game, the player who cannot reach the scene cannot see the setting suggestion effect at any time, It is impossible to give such a player the above-mentioned expectation and motive for continuing the game. In addition, if the content of the setting suggestion effect is uniform, the player gets used to the setting suggestion effect while the number of games is repeated, and even if the setting suggestion effect is executed, the player does not have much expectation, There is a possibility that it may be difficult to connect to the motive for continuing the game.

On the other hand, in the present solution means, the first setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect can be executed, and different contents are suggested regarding the setting by each of these effects. Further, the first setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect are executed at different frequencies depending on the game state. Therefore, according to the present solving means, it is possible to execute the setting suggestion effect in which the contents of the setting suggestion have variations, give the player the pleasure of playing the game while inferring the suggested contents, and give the player a game. Can be attracted to. In addition, since each setting suggestion effect is executed at different frequencies in a plurality of game states, the player often has a chance to see the setting suggestion effect. It is possible to give the player the motivation to see, and further, the motivation to continue the game for a long time on a specific platform that is presumed to be a high setting from the result.

Solving means 2: The game machine of the present solving means further includes setting history storage means for storing a history relating to the change of the setting in the solving means 1, and the first setting suggestion effect executing means has the setting changed. That is, the second setting suggestion effect execution means can execute the effect suggesting the setting, and the setting suggestion effect execution control means can perform at least the first setting suggestion effect. The history is used to control execution.

The following features are added to this solution.
(7) When the setting of (3) above is changed, the history of the setting change is stored.

(8) As the first setting suggestion effect of the above (4), an effect suggesting that the setting has been changed can be executed.

(9) As the second setting suggesting effect of the above (5), an effect suggesting the setting itself can be executed.

(10) The history of (7) is used at least for controlling the execution of the first setting suggestion effect of (8).

In the present solution means, a history of setting changes is stored, and the execution of the setting suggestion effect is controlled using the stored history. Therefore, according to the present solving means, a setting change suggesting effect (first setting suggesting effect) that suggests that the setting has been changed, and a current setting suggesting effect (second setting suggesting effect) that suggests the setting itself are provided. Since it is possible to perform, it is possible to execute more various setting suggestion effects.

Solving means 3: In the gaming machine of the present solving means, in the solving means 2, the second setting suggesting effect executing means can further execute an effect suggesting that a predetermined setting has been used within a predetermined period. is there.

The following features are added to this solution.
(11) As the second setting suggestive effect of (9), it is further determined that a predetermined setting (for example, setting 4 or more) is used within a predetermined period (for example, the last 10 days including the current day). The suggested performance can be executed.

In the present solution, not only the current setting suggestion but also the setting performance suggestion suggesting that the predetermined setting has been used within the predetermined period can be executed as the setting suggestion effect suggesting the setting itself. is there. Therefore, according to the present solving means, it is possible to execute more various setting suggestion effects.

Solving means 4: In the gaming machine of the present solving means, in the solving means 3, the setting history storage means stores, together with the changed setting, determination information indicating whether or not the setting has been used for a game, as the history. The setting suggestion effect execution control means executes the second setting suggestion effect using the setting in which the determination information indicating that it has been used for the game is stored among the settings stored in the history. To control.

The following features are added to this solution.
(12) As the history of (7) above, determination information indicating, together with the changed setting (setting value), whether or not the setting has been used for the game (whether or not the game has been played a predetermined number of times or more with the setting value) (Valid flag) is stored.

(13) In controlling the execution of the second setting suggestive effect of (11), it is used in the game of the history of (12) (the game is played a predetermined number of times or more with the set value). The setting in which the determination information is stored (the setting value in which the valid flag is “ON (valid)”) is used.

In the present solution, the stored history is used to control the execution of the second setting suggestion effect of setting result suggestion, but at this time, determination information indicating that the game has been actually used is added. Only the settings are used and reflected in the performance. Therefore, according to the present solving means, it is possible to execute a more realistic effect of setting result suggestion based on the use result of the set value in the gaming machine, and it is possible to execute more various setting suggestion effects.

According to the present invention, various effects related to setting can be executed.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view showing the game board unit alone. It is a front view which expands and shows a part of game board unit. It is a block diagram which shows various electronic devices with which a pachinko machine was equipped. It is the block diagram which shows the functional constitution inside the production control control equipment. It is a diagram showing a relationship between the setting and the winning probability of the special symbol lottery. It is a flowchart (1/2) which shows the example of a procedure of CPU initialization processing. It is a flowchart (2/2) which shows the example of a procedure of CPU initialization processing. It is a flow chart which shows the example of a procedure of save processing at the time of power failure. It is a flow chart which shows the example of a procedure of command reception interruption processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a timer interruption process. It is a flow chart which shows the example of a procedure of switch input event processing. It is the flowchart which shows the procedure example of the 1st special design memory renewal processing. It is the flowchart which shows the procedure example of 2nd special design memory renewal processing. It is a flow chart which shows the example of a procedure of production judgment processing at the time of acquisition. It is the flowchart which shows the constitution example of special design game processing. It is a figure which shows the opening operation pattern of a variable winning device. It is the flowchart which shows the procedure example of the special design fluctuation pre-processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the variation pattern selection table at the time of detachment. It is a figure showing an example of composition of a stop symbol selection table at the time of the 1st special symbol big hit. It is a diagram showing a configuration example of a stop symbol selection table during the second special symbol big hit. It is a figure showing an example of a big hit time variation pattern selection table. It is a flow chart which shows the example of a procedure of special symbol storage area shift processing. It is a flow chart which shows the example of a procedure of processing during special symbol stop display. It is a flow chart which shows the example of composition of display output management processing. It is a flow chart which shows the example of composition of the variable winning a prize device management processing at the time of a big hit. It is a flow chart which shows the example of a procedure of big winning opening opening pattern setting processing at the time of a big hit. It is a flow chart which shows the example of a procedure of big winning opening opening and closing operation processing at the time of a big hit. It is a flow chart which shows the example of a procedure of big winning opening closing processing at the time of a big hit. It is a flow chart which shows the example of a procedure of end processing at the time of a big hit. It is a flow chart which shows the example of composition of the variable winning a prize device management processing at the time of a small hit. It is a flow chart which shows the example of a procedure of big winning opening opening pattern setting processing at the time of a small hit. It is a flow chart which shows the example of a procedure of big winning opening opening and closing operation processing at the time of a small hit. It is a flow chart which shows the example of a procedure of big winning opening closing processing at the time of a small hit. It is a flow chart which shows the example of a procedure of end processing at the time of a small hit. It is a figure explaining the game flow developed when it corresponds to "12 round normal design" or "12 round probability variation designs 1 and 2" in normal mode. It is a figure explaining the game flow developed when it corresponds to "16 round probability variation design" or "6 round probability variation design 1 and 2" in fireworks rush or the seashore mode. It is the continuation figure which shows the example of the production image which corresponds to the fluctuation indication and the stop indication of the special design. It is the continuation figure which shows the flow of the super reach production which is executed while the fluctuation display of the special design. It is the figure which shows the production example of demonstration production. It is a figure showing a production example of a setting suggestion production which appears during a demonstration production (1/3). It is a figure showing an example of an effect of setting suggestion effect which appears during a demonstration effect (2/3). It is a figure showing a production example of a setting suggestion production that appears during a demonstration production (3/3). It is a continuous view which partially shows an example of the effect during the major role when it corresponds to "12 round normal pattern" or the like (1/4). It is a continuous view which partially shows an example of the effect during the major role in the case of corresponding to "12 round normal pattern" (2/4). It is a continuation diagram which partially shows an example of the effect during the big role when it corresponds to "12 round normal pattern" or the like (3/4). It is a continuation diagram which partially shows an example of the effect during the big role when it corresponds to "12 round normal pattern" or the like (4/4). It is a continuous view showing an example of the effect of a firework rush. It is a continuation view which partially shows an example of a big winning effect which is executed during a big hit game in the case of corresponding to "6 round probability variation pattern 1" or the like. It is a continuation view which partially shows an example of the large-effect production during the big hit game when it corresponds to the “16 round probability variation pattern”. It is a continuous view showing an example of production in the coastal mode. It is the flowchart which shows the procedure example of production control processing. It is a flow chart which shows the example of a procedure of operation memory production management processing. It is the flowchart which shows the procedure example of production design management processing. It is the flowchart which shows the procedure example of production design fluctuation pre-processing. It is a flow chart which shows the example of a procedure of setting suggestion production management processing. It is a figure explaining the specification of setting history data. It is a figure explaining the update example of setting history data (1/4). It is a figure explaining the update example of setting history data (2/4). It is a figure explaining the update example of setting history data (3/4). It is a figure explaining the update example of setting history data (4/4). It is a figure which shows the lottery opportunity of setting suggestion production. It is a figure explaining an internal state concerning execution of setting suggestion production. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the candidate data of the vertical axis|shaft for lottery which concerns on setting suggestion production (1/3). It is a figure which shows the structural example of the candidate data of the vertical axis|shaft for lottery which concerns on setting suggestion production (2/3). It is a figure which shows the structural example of the candidate data of the vertical axis|shaft for lottery which concerns on setting suggestion production (3/3). The figure which shows an example of the production pattern of setting suggestion production. It is a flow chart which shows the example of composition of processing at the time of operation of a variable winning device.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter abbreviated as “pachinko machine”) 1. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 1. The pachinko machine 1 uses a game ball as a game medium, and the player borrows the game ball from the game hall operator to perform a game with the pachinko machine 1. In the game on the pachinko machine 1, each game ball is a medium in which each one has a game value, and the privilege (profit) that the player enjoys as a result of the game is, for example, the game ball acquired by the player. It can be converted into a game value based on the number of. Hereinafter, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2.

〔overall structure〕
The pachinko machine 1 mainly includes an outer frame unit 2, an integrated door unit 4, and an inner frame assembly 7 (plastic frame, game machine frame) as its main body. When viewed from the front facing the player, the integrated door unit 4 is located on the frontmost side. The inner frame assembly 7 is located on the back side (back side) of the integrated door unit 4, and the outer frame unit 2 is arranged so as to surround the outer side of the inner frame assembly 7.

The outer frame unit 2 is a structure in which wood and metal materials are combined in a vertically long rectangular shape, and the outer frame unit 2 has fasteners such as screws for island equipment (not shown) in the game arcade. It is fixed by using. In the vertically long rectangular outer frame unit 2, wood is used for the parts corresponding to the upper and lower short sides, and a metal material is used for the parts corresponding to the left and right long sides.

The integrated door unit 4 has a structure in which the tray unit 6 is integrated at the lower position. The integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 are attached to the island facility via the outer frame unit 2, and each of these operates in an openable and closable manner via a hinge mechanism (not shown). The opening/closing axis of the hinge mechanism (not shown) extends in the vertical direction along the left end when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1.

A unified lock unit 9 is provided inside the right edge portion (left edge portion in FIG. 2) of the inner frame assembly 7 when viewed from the front in FIG. Correspondingly, locking tools (not shown) are also provided on the right edge portions (back side) of the integrated door unit 4 and the outer frame unit 2, respectively. As shown in FIG. 1, in the state where the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 are closed with respect to the outer frame unit 2, the unified lock unit 9 on the back side of the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 together with the locking tool. The opening of 7 is disabled.

A cylinder lock 6a with a key hole is provided on the right side edge of the tray unit 6. For example, when the manager of the game arcade inserts a dedicated key into the key hole and twists the cylinder lock 6a in the clockwise direction, the unified lock unit 9 is operated and the inner frame assembly 7 and the integrated door unit 4 can be opened. .. When all of these are opened from the outer frame unit 2 to the front side (moved like a door), the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is exposed on the front side.

On the other hand, when the cylinder lock 6a is twisted counterclockwise, only the locking of the integrated door unit 4 is released while the inner frame assembly 7 remains locked, and the integrated door unit 4 can be opened. When the integrated door unit 4 is opened to the front side, the game board unit 8 is directly exposed, and in this state, the manager of the game hall can remove obstacles such as ball clogging in the board surface. When the integrated door unit 4 is opened, the tray unit 6 is also opened to the front side.

Further, the pachinko machine 1 includes a game board unit 8 as a game unit. The game board unit 8 is supported by the inner frame assembly 7 behind (inside) the integrated door unit 4. The game board unit 8 can be attached to and detached from the inner frame assembly 7 in a state where the integrated door unit 4 is opened to the front side, for example. The integrated door unit 4 has a vertically elongated circular window 4a formed in the center thereof, and a glass unit (no reference numeral) is attached to the window 4a. The glass unit is, for example, a combination of two transparent plates (glass plates) cut according to the shape of the window 4a. The glass unit is attached to the back side of the integrated door unit 4 via an attachment tool (not shown). A game area 8a (board surface, game board) is formed on the front surface of the game board unit 8, and this game area 8a is visible to the player from the front side through the window 4a. When the integrated door unit 4 is closed, a space where the game ball can flow down is formed between the inner surface of the glass unit and the board surface.

[Structure of bowl]
The tray unit 6 has a shape that protrudes from the integrated door unit 4 to the front side as a whole, and an upper tray 6b is formed on the upper surface thereof. In this upper plate 6b, game balls (rental balls) lent to the player and game balls (prize balls) obtained by winning can be stored. Further, in the tray unit 6, a lower tray 6c is formed at a lower position of the upper tray 6b. In the lower plate 6c, the game balls further paid out in a state where the upper plate 6b is full are stored. Note that the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is a so-called CR machine (a model that is connected to a CR unit), and the game balls borrowed by the player are different from the prize balls from the payout device unit 172 on the back side to the saucer unit 6 (upper). It is dispensed to the plate 6b or the lower plate 6c).

A lending operation unit 14 is provided on the upper surface of the tray unit 6, and a ball lending button 10 and a return button 12 are arranged on the lending operation unit 14. When a player operates the ball lending button 10 with a valuable medium (for example, a magnetic recording medium, a memory IC built-in medium, etc.) inserted in a CR unit (not shown), the number corresponding to a predetermined frequency unit (for example, 5 degrees) (For example, 125) game balls are rented out. For this reason, a frequency display section (not shown) is arranged on the upper surface of the lending operation section 14, and the frequency display section displays the remaining frequency of the valuable medium loaded in the CR unit. It should be noted that the player can return the valuable medium with the remaining frequency by operating the return button 12. Although a CR machine is taken as an example in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 may be a cash machine (a model that is not connected to the CR unit) different from the CR machine.

Further, on the upper surface of the tray unit 6, an upper plate ball removing button 6d is installed in front of the upper plate 6b in the upper position, and a lower plate ball removing lever 6e is provided in the center of the lower plate 6c. Is installed. The player can cause the game balls stored in the upper plate 6b to flow down to the lower plate 6c by pushing the upper plate ball removal button 6d, for example. Further, the player can slide the lower plate ball removing lever 6e, for example, to the left to drop and discharge the game balls stored in the lower plate 6c. The discharged game balls are received in, for example, a ball receiving box (not shown).

A handle unit 16 is installed in the lower right part of the saucer unit 6. The player operates the firing control board set 174 by operating the handle unit 16 to launch (striking) a game ball toward the game area 8a (ball launch device). The launched game ball rises along the left side edge from the lower edge of the game board unit 8, is guided by an outer band (not shown), and is thrown into the game area 8a. A large number of obstacle nails and windmills (without reference numerals in the figure) are arranged in the game area 8a, and the thrown game balls flow down in the game area 8a while being guided and guided by the obstacle nails and windmills. The structure of the game area 8a (board surface, game board) will be described later with reference to another drawing.

[Structure of front of frame]
In the integrated door unit 4, a left top lens unit 47 and an upper right lighting unit 49 are installed as components for production. Among them, the left top lens unit 47 incorporates a glass frame top lamp 46 and a left glass frame decoration lamp 48, and the right upper illumination unit 49 incorporates a right glass frame decoration lamp 50. The glass frame top lamp 46 includes a logo lamp 45 (for example, a lamp representing a large logo made of English letters "SPADEWORK") in a part thereof. In addition, the integrated door unit 4 is provided with the left and right glass frame decoration lamps 52 so as to be continuous below the left top lens unit 47 and the upper right electric decoration unit 49, respectively. It extends so as to wrap around from the left and right edges of the integrated door unit 4 to the position above the saucer unit 6. In the integrated door unit 4, the glass frame top lamp 46, the left and right glass frame decoration lamps 48, 50, 52, etc. are arranged so as to surround the glass unit.

The various lamps 46, 48, 50, and 52 described above perform effects by, for example, light emission (lighting or blinking, change in luminance gradation, change in color tone, etc.) of the built-in LED. In addition, in the upper part of the integrated door unit 4, the left top lens unit 47 and the upper right electric decoration unit 49 each have a glass frame speaker 54 incorporated therein, and the left and right glass frame decoration lamps 52 each have a glass frame speaker 55. Is built in. On the other hand, the inner frame speaker 56 is incorporated in the lower right position of the inner frame assembly 7 (the upper left position of the handle unit 16 when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1), and the outer frame speaker is located in the lower left position of the outer frame unit 2. 58 is incorporated. These speakers 54, 55, 56, 58 output sound effects, BGM, voice, etc. (general sound) and execute the effect.

[Operating member]
Further, at the center of the tray unit 6, an operation unit 60 is installed so as to project upward from the upper plate 6b (operation means). The operation unit 60 has a large push button 64 at the center thereof, and a handle lever 62 on the left side of the push button 64. The operation unit 60 can accept operations in various scenes shown in the presentation. In some scenes in the production, the handle lever 62 is pulled in by the player toward the front side, and in another scene, the push button 64 is pushed in. The player operates the operation unit 60 in various modes to switch the effect contents (for example, the background screen displayed on the liquid crystal display 42), for example, during the change of the symbol, the confirmation display of the big hit, or the big hit. It is possible to generate some kind of effect (preliminary effect, probable change promotion effect, promotion effect during major role, etc.) during the game.

Further, a ring-shaped portion 65 is installed around the push button 64 so as to surround the push button 64. Unlike the handle lever 62 and the push button 64, the ring-shaped portion 65 is a member provided for decoration and rotates counterclockwise in conjunction with the pulling operation of the handle lever 62. In addition, the ring-shaped portion 65 has a plurality of cells that are divided at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. Although these cells cannot accept the operation by the player, they are effectively used in the case of notifying the player of the operation method.

When the player is requested to perform some operation, a reduced-size image showing the operation method of the operation unit 60 is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. At this time, the ring-shaped portion 65 in the reduced-size image is expressed as if each cell is a lamp in order to inform the player of the time when the specified operation can be performed (operation effective time). It More specifically, the ring-shaped portion 65 in the reduced-size image is represented as if all the cells are lit when it becomes operable, and the cells are turned off one by one as the remaining time decreases. It is represented as if all cells were turned off when the remaining time runs out. The actual ring-shaped portion 65 does not have a light source and does not turn on/off like the ring-shaped portion 65 shown in the reduced image displayed on the screen, but the ring-shaped portion in the reduced image does not. By switching on/off of the part 65 in this manner, the player can sensuously grasp the remaining operation time.

Furthermore, the push button 64 is configured to project largely upward when a predetermined trigger is generated in the course of the game. When the push button 64 is projected, the push button 64 pops up to a height that is about three times as high as in normal times. The push button 64 has a light source inside. The push button 64 normally emits light of one color (for example, blue) or multiple colors, but emits more colorfully at the time of protrusion to exhibit a very strong presence. By such operation of the push button 64, it is possible to let the player recognize that the pressing operation of the button required in this scene is particularly important.

Although the handle lever 62 and the push button 64 are mounted on the same operation unit 60 in the present embodiment, the handle lever 62 and the push button 64 may be provided as independent operating members. Further, these operation members may be arranged at close positions or may be arranged at distant positions.

In addition, a direction key 66 is installed on the upper surface of the tray unit 6 adjacent to the lending operation unit 14. The direction key 66 is formed by arranging four key switches indicating up, down, left, and right in a cross shape, and the key switches for each direction can be independently pushed. The player can arbitrarily move the cursor and the like displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display by pressing the direction key 66 in various scenes in the production and operating it.

[Backside configuration]
As shown in FIG. 2, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, a power supply control unit 162, a main control board unit 170, a payout device unit 172, a flow path unit 173, a firing control board set 174, a payout control board unit 176. , A back cover unit 178 and the like are installed. In addition to this, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, various electronic devices (including a control computer (not shown)) constituting the power supply system and control system of the pachinko machine 1, an external terminal board 160, a power cord (power plug) 164, A ground wire (ground terminal) 166, connection wiring (not shown), etc. are installed. The electronic devices will be further described later with reference to another block diagram (FIGS. 5 and 6).

The main control board unit 170 has a built-in main controller, and the performance display monitor 200 is connected to the main controller. The performance display monitor 200 is arranged in the main control device in a visible manner in the upper left area of the main control board unit 170 when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the back side, and includes four 7-segment LEDs. The four 7-segment LEDs are arranged side by side in the left-right direction, and each 7-segment LED is composed of seven segments that can display a decimal Arabic numeral and a dot segment located at the lower right of the segment. Has been done. The performance display monitor 200 is visible through the transparent case that covers the main control board unit 170.

Further, the main controller is provided with a RAM clear switch 304 and a setting key keyhole 306. The RAM clear switch 304 is a switch used for clearing the RAM, that is, for initializing the RAM (RWM) installed in the main control device, and in the present embodiment, also serves as a switch for changing the setting. To be done. The setting key keyhole 306 is a keyhole for inserting a setting key required for changing or referring to settings relating to a game of the pachinko machine 1. Note that the setting change will be described later with reference to another drawing.

The RAM clear switch 304 is provided so that it can be pressed through a through hole formed in a transparent case that covers the main control board unit 170. The RAM clear switch 304 may be arranged outside the transparent case. The setting key keyhole 306 is provided in a state where the key cylinder penetrates the transparent case (the transparent case surrounds the key cylinder). Therefore, the setting key can be inserted and rotated while the transparent case remains sealed.

The arrangement positions of the performance display monitor 200, the RAM clear switch 304, and the setting key hole 306 shown in FIG. 2 are merely examples, and they can be arranged at arbitrary positions. The performance display monitor 200, the RAM clear switch 304, and the setting key keyhole 306 may be provided outside the main controller and connected to the main controller.

The payout device unit 172 has, for example, a prize ball tank 172a and a prize ball case (no reference numeral), of which the prize ball tank 172a is installed at the upper edge (back side) of the inner frame assembly 7. , It is possible to store the game balls replenished from the replenishment route not shown. The game balls stored in the prize ball tank 172a are guided to the prize ball case through an upper prize ball gutter (not shown). The flow path unit 173 guides the game balls sent from the payout device unit 172 toward the saucer unit 6 on the front surface side.

Further, the external terminal board 160 is for connecting the pachinko machine 1 to an external electronic device (for example, a data display device, a hall computer, etc.), and from this external terminal board 160, the game progress state of the pachinko machine 1 And various external information signals (such as prize ball information, door opening information, symbol determination frequency information, big hit information, starting opening information, etc.) that indicate maintenance status, etc. are output to external electronic devices. ..

The power cord 164 secures a power source (electric power) necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 1 by being connected to, for example, a power source device (for example, AC 24V) installed in an island facility of a game arcade. The ground wire 166 is also connected to a ground terminal similarly installed in the island facility to secure the ground (ground) of the pachinko machine 1.

FIG. 3 is a front view showing the game board unit 8 alone. The game board unit 8 includes a game board 8b serving as a base, and a game area 8a is formed on the front surface side of the game board 8b. The game board 8b is made of, for example, a transparent resin plate, and the front surface of the game board 8b is parallel to the glass unit when the game board unit 8 is fixed to the inner frame assembly 7. On the front surface of the game board 8b, a game area 8a is formed inside a firing rail (no reference numeral) installed in a substantially circular shape. The launch rail extends in the clockwise direction from the lower left corner position of the game board 8b to the upper right corner position of the game board 8b.

In the game area 8a, a relatively large effect unit 40 is arranged at the center position, and the game area 8a is largely divided into a left part, a right part and a lower part with the effect unit 40 as the center. The left side portion of the game area 8a is a first game area (left hitting area) used in a normal game state (low probability non-time shortened state), and the right side portion of the game area 8a is a special game state (big hit game state). , A small hit game state, a low probability time shortened state, a high probability time shortened state, etc.) is a second game area (right hitting area, specific area). The left side portion of the game area 8a is also used in the high probability non-time shortened state (advantageous game state). Further, in the game area 8a, a medium start winning opening 26, a starting gate 20, ordinary winning openings 22, 24, a variable starting winning device 28, a first variable winning device 30, a second variable winning device around the effect unit 40. 31 etc. are distributed and installed.

Of these, the middle start winning hole 26 is arranged in the center of the lower portion of the game area 8a. The starting gate 20, the variable start winning device 28, the second variable winning device 31, and the first variable winning device 30 are arranged on the right side of the game area 8a in this order from the top. Here, the first variable winning device 30 is arranged on the right side of the middle start winning port 26, and the second variable winning device 31 is arranged on the upper right of the first variable winning device 30. Further, the three left-side normal winning openings 22 are arranged in the left side portion of the game area 8a, and the right-side one normal winning openings 24 (predetermined winning openings) are arranged below the variable start winning device 28. ..

Further, four obstacle nails are arranged above the variable start winning device 28, and a ball entrance 19a and a discharge opening 19b are further arranged above them. The ball inlet 19a and the outlet 19b are connected by a communication passage on the back side (not shown). The game ball that has entered the ball entrance 19a is decelerated and rectified through this communication passage, and is discharged from the discharge port 19b.
Further, an outlet 19c (predetermined entrance) is arranged on the right side of the starting gate 20. The game ball discharged from the discharge port 19b basically falls straight and passes through the starting gate 20, but enters the out port 19c when it is flipped to the right by an obstacle nail.

The game ball thrown into the game area 8a enters the middle start winning opening 26, the normal winning openings 22 and 24, passes through the starting gate 20, and is a variable starting winning device at the time of operation. 28, the first variable winning device 30 during the opening operation, and the second variable winning device 31 during the opening operation. Here, there is a possibility that the game ball flowing down the left side area of the game area 8a mainly enters the middle start winning opening 26 or the normal winning opening 22. On the other hand, the game ball flowing down the right side area of the game area 8a enters the ball entrance 19a and is discharged from the discharge opening 19b, and mainly passes through the starting gate 20 or the variable start winning device 28 during operation. There is a possibility of entering the ball, entering the first variable winning device 30 during the opening operation, entering the second variable winning device 31 during the opening operation, or entering the normal winning opening 24. The game ball that has passed through the starting gate 20 continues to flow down in the game area 8a, but the middle starting winning opening 26, the normal winning openings 22 and 24, the variable starting winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, the second variable winning device. The game balls that have entered the device 31 and the outlet 19c are collected to the back side of the game board unit 8 through through holes formed in the game board (plywood material that constitutes the game board unit 8, transparent plate, etc.).

Here, in the present embodiment, due to the structure of the game area 8a (board surface), when a game ball is to be inserted into the middle start winning opening 26 or the normal winning opening 22, an area on the left side in the gaming area 8a (left hitting) It is necessary to hit a game ball in the area) (execute a so-called "left hit").

On the other hand, in the case of entering a game ball into the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, the second variable winning device 31, and the normal winning hole 24, the right part of the game area 8a (the right-handed area) ) Must be hit with a game ball (a so-called "right hit" is executed).

In the present embodiment, the variable start winning device 28 operates when a predetermined operation condition is satisfied (when a normal symbol is stopped and displayed for a predetermined stop display time in a winning manner), and accordingly, right start. It enables to enter the winning opening 28a (predetermined entrance) (normal electric accessory). The variable start winning device 28 is provided with a tongue-shaped (bello type) opening/closing member 28b. In the state shown in the drawing, the opening/closing member 28b is at a position retracted from the board surface (a retracted position), which makes it difficult or difficult for the game ball to enter the right start winning opening 28a. On the other hand, when the opening/closing member 28b moves to a position (driving position) protruding toward the front side from the board surface, the opening/closing member 28b receives the game ball flowing down from above and guides the game ball to the right start winning opening 28a (right). It becomes possible or easy to enter the starting winning opening 28a). The variable start winning device 28 may be a device that opens and closes the right starting winning opening by displacing the opening/closing member such that the lower end edge portion of the opening/closing member leans forward.

The first variable winning device 30 is a predetermined first condition (for example, from the first round of the big hit game) when the prescribed condition is satisfied (when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of big hit or small hit). It operates when the conditions of being the 5th round, or the 7th to 16th rounds, and the condition that the small hit game is open) are satisfied, and it is possible to enter the first big winning opening 30b. (Special electric accessory, first special entry event generating means).

The first variable winning device 30 is a device arranged on the right side of the middle starting winning opening 26 (so-called lower attacker), and has, for example, one opening/closing member 30a. The first variable winning device 30 is a type of device in which the opening/closing member 30a slides inside the board surface (sliding type attacker). The opening/closing member 30a reciprocates in the front-rear direction with respect to the board surface by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown). The opening/closing member 30a is in the closed position (closed state) in a state of protruding from the board surface to the player side, and at this time the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the opening/closing member 30a, so to the first big winning opening 30b. Is impossible or difficult (the first big winning opening 30b is closed). When the first variable winning device 30 operates, the opening/closing member 30a is pulled into the inside of the board to open the first big winning opening 30b (open state). During this time, the first variable winning device 30 is in a state (possible or easy) in which the inflow of the game balls is not impossible, and it is possible to cause an event of entering the first big winning opening 30b.

The second variable winning device 31 is the same as the first variable winning device 30 when the prescribed condition is satisfied (when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of a big hit), and the predetermined second condition (for example, It operates when the condition of being the sixth round of the jackpot game) is satisfied, and allows the player to enter the second special winning opening 31b (specific winning opening) (special electric accessory, second special winning). Sphere event generation means).

The second variable winning device 31 is a device arranged at the upper right of the first variable winning device 30 (so-called upper attacker), and has, for example, one opening/closing member 31a. The second variable winning device 31 is a device in which the opening/closing member 31a slides inside the board surface (sliding type attacker). The opening/closing member 31a reciprocates in the front-rear direction with respect to the board surface by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown), for example. The opening/closing member 31a is in the closed position (closed state) in a state of protruding from the board surface to the player side, and at this time, the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the opening/closing member 31a, so to the second big winning opening 31b. Is impossible or difficult (the second big winning opening 31b is closed). When the second variable winning device 31 operates, the opening/closing member 31a is pulled into the inside of the board, and the second special winning opening 31b is opened (open state). During this time, the second variable winning a prize device 31 is in a state in which the inflow of the game balls is not impossible (possible or easy), and it is possible to cause an event of a ball entering the second special winning opening 31b.

In addition, inside the second variable winning device 31, a guide passage 31c for guiding the game ball that has entered the second variable winning device 31 is arranged. The guide passage 31c extends downward from the second special winning opening 31b, bends leftward from there, extends downward leftward, and then extends downward again.

The second count switch 85 is disposed upstream of the guide passage 31c, and the probability variation region vane member 31d and the probability variation region hole 31e are disposed in the middle flow of the guide passage 31c. A discharge port 31f is arranged downstream of.

The game ball that entered the second variable winning device 31 is detected by the second count switch 85 first. Here, when the probability variation region solenoid that operates the probability variation region blade member 31d is ON, the probability variation region blade member 31d rises to guide the game ball to the probability variation region hole 31e. On the other hand, when the probability variation region solenoid that operates the probability variation region blade member 31d is OFF, the probability variation region blade member 31d does not rise, so the game ball passes through the upper portion of the probability variation region blade member 31d, It is guided to the discharge port 31f.

[Probability variation area (specific area)]
Further, a probability variation region (no reference numeral) is provided inside the probability variation region hole 31e. The probability variation region is a region in which the game ball cannot pass when the second variable winning device 31 is in the closed state, and the second variation winning device 31 is in the open state, and the probability variation region blade member 31d is activated. If it is, it is an area through which the game ball can pass.

The probability variation region vane member 31d operates when the second variable winning device 31 is opened during the big hit game. The operation pattern of the probability variation region vane member 31d is such that the production region is opened for a short period (for example, 0.1 seconds) at the same time as the start of the round, and then closed for a few seconds (about 2 to 3 seconds) and then the probability variation region for a long period of time. It is a pattern in which a long opening is performed (for example, about 20 seconds). In addition, since the game ball does not reach the probability variation region blade member 31d in the short-term opening executed at the same time as the start of the round, this operation does not lead the game ball to the probability variation region. Even if the probability variation area blade member 31d operates, the game ball does not pass through the probability variation area when the second variable winning device 31 opens in a short circuit.

In the game board unit 8, a performance unit 40 is installed from the central position to the right side portion. The effect unit 40 has its upper edge 40a functioning as a guide member for changing the flow direction of the game ball, and is provided with various decorative parts 40b, 40c inside thereof. The decorative parts 40b and 40c can enhance the decorativeness of the game board unit 8 by their three-dimensional modeling, and can perform a dramatic operation by emitting transmitted light by, for example, a built-in light emitting device (LED or the like). .. Further, a liquid crystal display 42 (image display) is installed inside the effect unit 40, and various effect images including effect symbols corresponding to special symbols are displayed on the liquid crystal indicator 42. .. In this way, the game board unit 8 impresses the player with the characteristics of the pachinko machine 1 based on the configuration of the board surface and the decorativeness of the effect unit 40. In addition, when the game board 8b is a transparent resin plate (for example, an acrylic board) as in the present embodiment, various decorative bodies (including a movable body and a light emitting body) arranged not only on the front side but also behind the game board 8b. ) Can add a decorative property.

In addition, inside the rendering unit 40, a drive source (eg, motor, solenoid, etc.) is attached together with a rendering movable body 40f (eg, a decoration imitating a vehicle on which a female character is riding). The movable body 40f for effect can perform an effect accompanied by the operation of a tangible object in addition to the effect using the image on the liquid crystal display 42 and the effect by the light emitter. By the effect using the movable body 40f, it is possible to exert an appealing power different from the effect using the two-dimensional image.

A ball guide passage 40d is formed at the left edge of the effect unit 40, and a rolling stage 40e is formed at the lower edge thereof. The ball guide passage 40d opens diagonally upward to the left in the game area 8a, and when a game ball flowing down in the game area 8a flows into the ball guide passage 40d at random, the ball guide passage 40d rolls through the inside. It is discharged onto the stage 40e. The upper surface of the rolling stage 40e has a smooth curved surface, and here the game ball can roll in the left-right direction. The game ball rolled on the rolling stage 40e eventually flows down into the lower game area 8a. A ball discharge path 40k is formed at the center of the rolling stage 40e, and the game ball guided from the rolling stage 40e to the ball discharge path 40k easily flows into the middle start winning hole 26 located directly below the game ball. ..

In addition, an out port 32 is formed in the game area 8a, and game balls that have not entered (winned) the various winning ports are finally collected to the back side of the game board unit 8 through the out port 32. In addition, the game area including the normal winning openings 22 and 24, the middle starting winning opening 26, the right starting winning opening 28a, the first variable winning device 30, the second variable winning device 31, and the game ball entering the out opening 19c. All the game balls hit in 8a are collected on the back side of the game board unit 8. The collected game balls are discharged from the back side of the pachinko machine 1 to the outside of the frame through an out passage assembly (not shown), and further join a supply route of island equipment (not shown).

FIG. 4 is an enlarged front view showing a part of the game board unit 8 (lower left position in the window 4a). As shown in the figure, in the game board unit 8, for example, a normal symbol display device 33 and a normal symbol working memory lamp 33a are provided at the lower left position in the window 4a, as well as the first special symbol display device 34, the second. A special symbol display device 35 and a game state display device 38 are provided.

Of these, the normal symbol display device 33, for example, alternately lights two lamps (LEDs) to display the normal symbol in a variable manner, and stops and displays the normal symbol by turning on or off the lamp. The normal symbol working memory lamp 33a displays a memory number of 0 to 4 by a combination of turning off or lighting and blinking of two lamps (LEDs), for example. For example, in the display mode in which both the two lamps are turned off, the number of memories is 0, in the display mode in which one lamp is turned on, the number of memories is 1 is displayed, and in the display mode in which the same one lamp is blinked. Two memory numbers are displayed, three memory numbers are displayed in the display mode in which one lamp is blinked and another lamp is turned on, and four memory numbers are displayed in the display mode in which two lamps are both blinked. For example, displaying individual pieces. Although two lamps (LED) are used here, four lamps (LED) may be used to configure the normal symbol working memory lamp 33a. In this case, the working memory number can be displayed by the number of lamps that are turned on.

The normal symbol working memory lamp 33a changes to a display mode after increasing one by one in the sense that it remembers that each time the game ball passes through the starting gate 20, a passage that triggers the working lottery occurs. Iki (up to a maximum of 4), the display pattern after the decrease is reduced by one each time the fluctuation of the ordinary symbol is triggered by the passage. In the present embodiment, when the normal symbol working memory lamp 33a is not lit (the number of memory is 0), the game ball passes through the starting gate 20 in a state where the normal symbol can already start changing (at the time of stop display). However, the display mode does not change. That is, the number of memories (maximum four) represented by the display mode of the normal symbol working memory lamp 33a represents the number of passages at which the fluctuation of the normal symbol has not yet started.

Further, the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35, for example, each 7 segment LED (with a dot), the corresponding 1st special symbol or the second special symbol variable state and stop state are displayed. Can be done (design display means). The first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35 may have a form in which a plurality of dot LEDs are geometrically (for example, circular) arranged.

Further, the first special symbol working memory lamp 34a and the second special symbol working memory lamp 35a are, for example, 0 to 4 pieces each according to a display mode configured by a combination of two lamps (LEDs) being turned off or turned on or blinking. The memory number of is displayed (memory number display means). For example, in the display mode in which both the two lamps are turned off, the number of memories is 0, in the display mode in which one lamp is turned on, the number of memories is 1 is displayed, and in the display mode in which the same one lamp is blinked. Two memory numbers are displayed, three memory numbers are displayed in the display mode in which one lamp is turned on and the other lamp is turned on, and three memory numbers are displayed in the display mode in which two lamps are both blinked. For example, 4 pieces are displayed.

The first special symbol working memory lamp 34a is increased by one in order to remember that each time a game ball enters the middle starting prize hole 26, it is remembered that the game ball has entered the middle starting prize hole 26. It changes to a mode (up to 4), and when the special ball starts to change when the ball is entered, it changes to a display mode after decreasing by one. Further, the second special symbol working memory lamp 35a is increased one by one in the sense that each time the game ball enters the variable start winning device 28, the fact that the game ball has entered the right starting winning opening 28a is stored. Display mode (up to 4), and each time the variation of the special symbol is triggered by the entry, the display mode is changed to one after reduction. In the present embodiment, when the first special symbol working memory lamp 34a is not lit (the number of memories is 0), the first special symbol can already start fluctuating (at the time of stop display), the medium starting winning opening 26. The display mode does not change even if a game ball enters. Also, if the second special symbol working memory lamp 35a is not lit (the number of memory is 0), the game ball enters the variable start winning device 28 in a state where the second special symbol can already start changing (at the time of stop display). The display mode does not change even if a ball is placed. That is, the number of memories (maximum 4) represented by the display mode of each of the special symbol working memory lamps 34a and 35a is the number of memorized balls at which the fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol has not started yet. Represents the number of times.

Further, the game state display device 38 includes LEDs corresponding to, for example, big hit type display lamps 38a, 38b, 38c, a probability variation state display lamp 38d, a time saving state display lamp 38e, and a firing position designation lamp 38f. In the present embodiment, the above-mentioned normal symbol display device 33, normal symbol working memory lamp 33a, first special symbol display device 34, second special symbol display device 35, first special symbol working memory lamp 34a, second special symbol The symbol working memory lamp 35a and the game state display device 38 are attached to the game board unit 8 in a state of being mounted on one integrated display board 89.

These LED lamps mounted on the integrated display substrate 89 are divided into four different control areas (hereinafter, referred to as “common”) for the purpose of controlling the switching of turning on or off. From a different point of view, the integrated display substrate 89 has four commons, and each lamp belongs to one of the commons. In the present embodiment, the dynamic lighting method is adopted, and the lamps are sequentially driven in common units at intervals of an interrupt cycle (for example, 4 ms). Therefore, all the lamps mounted on the integrated display board 89 are not driven at the same time.

[Control configuration]
Next, a configuration related to control of the pachinko machine 1 will be described. FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing various electronic devices mounted on the pachinko machine 1. The pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a main control device 70 (main control computer) that is the center of the control operation, and this main control device 70 mainly has a function of controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko machine 1. There is. The main controller 70 is built in the main control board unit 170.

Further, the main control device 70 is equipped with a circuit board (main control board) on which a main control CPU 72, which is a central processing unit, is mounted. The main control CPU 72 has a ROM 74, a RAM ( It is configured as an LSI in which a semiconductor memory such as RWM) 76 is integrated. The main controller 70 is equipped with a random number circuit 75, an interrupt controller (interrupt CTR) 192, a parallel I/O port 79, a timer circuit (PTC) 194, and a serial communication circuit (SCU) 196. Of these, the random number circuit 75 is for generating a hardware random number (for example, 0 to 65535 in decimal notation) for the big hit determination of the special symbol lottery and the hit determination of the normal symbol lottery, and the random number generated here is It is input to the main control CPU 72. Further, the interrupt controller 192 accepts each interrupt request (XINT interrupt, PTC interrupt, SCU interrupt) from the parallel I/O port 79, the timer circuit 194, and the serial communication circuit 196, and receives these interrupt requests. Control based on priority. In addition, the main control unit 70 is equipped with a clock generation circuit (not shown) and peripheral ICs such as a reset controller that monitors various states and generates a reset if necessary. These are provided together with the main control CPU 72 on a circuit board. Implemented on. A signal transmission path, a power supply path, a control bus, etc. are formed as a wiring pattern on the circuit board (or inner layer portion). The I/O port of main controller 70 may be of a serial type.

Further, the main control device 70 is provided with a setting changing device 300, a setting key switch 302, and a RAM clear switch 304. The main control device 70 (main control CPU 72) changes the setting by operating the setting changing device 300. The setting changing device 300 is a device for switching the setting (at least a plurality of setting values regarding the winning probability of the special symbol lottery) (setting changing means), and operates by operating the RAM clear switch 304 or the like. The setting means a combination of operating probabilities. Furthermore, the operation probability means the probability that a combination of special symbols that will cause the condition device to operate (which means that the big hit game will be executed) is displayed. The setting key switch 302 is an input device for inputting a signal (ON/OFF) indicating the rotating state of the setting key, which is essential for switching the setting. Although various procedures can be adopted as the procedure for changing the setting, for example, the following procedure can be used.

(1) First, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off.
(2) Next, open the door of the pachinko machine 1 with the dedicated key (door key). Specifically, the dedicated key is inserted into the key hole of the cylinder lock 6a and rotated to the right to open the integrated door unit 4 together with the inner frame assembly 7.
(3) On the back side of the pachinko machine 1, since the setting key keyhole 306 for inserting the setting key and the RAM clear switch 304 are provided, the setting key is inserted into the setting key keyhole 306 to set. Rotate the key to the right.
(4) Then, turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1.

(5) As a result, a signal (ON) indicating that the setting key has been rotated to the change position is input by the setting key switch 302, and the setting can be changed based on this input signal. At this time, a safety lock is applied by a lock mechanism (not shown). Therefore, the setting key cannot be removed unless it is returned to its original position.

When the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch 304 is turned on while the setting key is rotated to the right, the setting can be changed. On the other hand, if the power is turned on without turning on the RAM clear switch 304 while the setting key is rotated to the right, the setting can be referred to.

(6) By pressing the RAM clear switch 304 any number of times in a state in which the setting can be changed, the setting can be changed to any one of a plurality of steps provided in advance.
The set value can be displayed on the dedicated 7-segment LED, the game state display device 38 (special symbol display device, etc.), and the performance display monitor 200, for example.

(7) In the case of the slot machine, when the target setting is reached, the lever ON process is required, but since the pachinko machine 1 does not have a lever, an alternative process (for example, the setting key is left) instead of the lever ON process. The process of rotating in the direction, the process of turning on the setting change confirmation button (not shown), or the like, or the lever ON process may be omitted. In this embodiment, when the target setting is reached, the setting key is rotated counterclockwise to return to the original position. By this operation, a signal (OFF) indicating that the setting key has been returned to the original position is input by the setting key switch 302, and the setting change is confirmed based on this input signal.

(8) When the setting change is confirmed, the setting key can be removed from the setting key hole 306. Further, when the setting change is confirmed, if the set value is displayed on the dedicated 7-segment LED, the game status display device 38, and the performance display monitor 200, the display disappears.
(9) Finally, close the door of the pachinko machine 1. This completes the setting change. When the setting change is completed, a normal game is started.

When the setting is changed, the main control CPU72 stores the changed set value in the set value buffer of the RAM76. The set value buffer can be a memory area to be backed up.

[Setting change status]
When the power is turned on with the "setting key ON", "inner frame open state", and "RAM clear switch pressed state", the RAM is cleared and the setting is changed (setting change state, setting change mode). To do.

In the state where the setting is being changed, the main display (various lamps included in the game state display device 38) is not displayed, and the game ball cannot be shot or the game ball cannot be awarded. Further, in the performance display monitor 200, “rn.” is displayed on the two left 7-segment LEDs (identification segment) and the set value is displayed on the two right 7-segment LEDs (ratio segment) such as “−1”. Is displayed. When the RAM clear switch 304 is pressed, the set value changes within the range of 1-6. Then, when the "setting key is turned off", the setting is confirmed, and the "-" segment is turned off (is hidden) like "blank (non-display) 1" in the ratio segment display.

In this state, if the "inner frame closed state" is reached (actually, the closed state lasts for 100 ms), the state during the setting change is terminated and the state before the power is cut off is changed once. , The game is ready to be played.

In this embodiment, the RAM clear switch 304 also serves as the setting change switch, but the RAM clear switch 304 may not be used also as the setting change switch.

[Setting confirmation status]
On the other hand, when the power is turned on in the "setting key ON", "inner frame open state", and "state where the RAM clear switch is not pressed", the state is changed to the setting confirmation state (setting confirmation state, setting confirmation mode). ..

Similar to the state of changing the setting, in the state of confirming the setting, no display is made on the main display, and the game ball cannot be shot or the prize ball of the game ball cannot be played at all. Also, in the performance display monitor, “rn.” is displayed on the two 7-segment LEDs on the left side (identification segment), and “blank (non-display) 1” is displayed on the two 7-segment LEDs on the right side (ratio segment). The set value is displayed. In the state of confirming the setting, the set value does not change even if the RAM clear switch 304 is pressed.

In this state, if the setting key is OFF and the inner frame is closed (actually, the closed state continues for 100 ms), the setting confirmation state ends and the power is turned off once. After shifting to the previous state, shifts to the playable state.

In the present embodiment, the settings cannot be confirmed in the game-enabled state, but the settings may be confirmed in the game-enabled state.

The starting gate 20 described above is integrally provided with a gate switch 78 for detecting passage of a game ball. Further, in the game board unit 8, a medium start winning opening 26, a variable starting winning device 28, a first variable winning device 30 and a second variable winning device 31 respectively corresponding to a middle starting winning opening switch 80 and a right starting winning opening. The switch 82, the first count switch 84, and the second count switch 85 are provided. Each of the starting winning opening switches 80 and 82 is for detecting the entry of a game ball into the middle starting winning opening 26 and the variable starting winning device 28 (right starting winning opening 28a). The first count switch 84 is for detecting the number of game balls entering the first variable winning device 30 (first big winning opening) and counting the number. Further, the second count switch 85 is for detecting the number of game balls entering the second variable winning device 31 (the second special winning opening 31b) and counting the number thereof. Further, the probability variation area switch 95 is a switch for detecting that the game ball has passed through the probability variation area arranged inside the second variable winning device 31 (detection means).

Similarly, the game board unit 8 has a first winning opening switch 86 for detecting the entry of the game ball into the normal winning opening 22 and a second winning opening switch for detecting the entry of the game ball into the normal winning opening 24. 81 and is equipped. In addition, about the three normal winning openings 22 on the left side, the configuration using the common winning opening switch 86 is taken as an example, but, for example, three winning opening switches are installed, and the game balls for the respective normal winning openings 22 are provided. The incoming ball may be detected individually.

In any case, the winning detection signals of these switches are input to the main control CPU 72 via an input/output driver (not shown). Due to the configuration of the game board unit 8, in the present embodiment, the gate switch 78, the first count switch 84, the second count switch 85, the first winning opening switch 86, the second winning opening switch 81, the probability variation area switch 95. The winning detection signal is transmitted via the panel relay terminal board 87, and the panel relay terminal board 87 is provided with a wiring pattern and a connection terminal for relaying each winning detection signal.

The above-mentioned normal symbol display device 33, normal symbol working memory lamp 33a, first special symbol display device 34, second special symbol display device 35, first special symbol working memory lamp 34a, second special symbol working memory lamp 35a and game The display operation of the status display device 38 is controlled based on a control signal from the main control CPU 72. The main control CPU 72 outputs control signals to the display devices 33, 34, 35, 38 and the lamps 33a, 34a, 35a according to the progress of the game, and controls the lighting state of each LED. Further, the display devices 33, 34, 35, 38 and the lamps 33a, 34a, 35a are installed in the game board unit 8 in a state of being mounted on one integrated display board 89 as described above. A control signal is transmitted from the main control CPU 72 to the display board 89 by relaying the panel relay terminal board 87.

A performance display monitor 200 is connected to the main controller 70 via a panel relay terminal board 87. The performance display monitor 200 indicates the number of award balls paid out by entering the game balls into each winning opening (starting winning opening, normal winning opening), out number indicating the number of gaming balls fired in the game area (out switch). It is a monitor for displaying a base calculated by dividing by the number of game balls detected in 99). The base is calculated for each preset section using a region (non-use region) different from the use region used for the control of advancing the game, and the base of the current section and the base of the previous section are calculated. , Are switched and displayed at preset intervals. The display operation of the performance display monitor 200 is controlled based on a control signal from the main control CPU 72. The main control CPU 72 outputs a control signal to the performance display monitor 200 according to the calculation status of the base to control the lighting state of each 7 segment.

Although the performance display monitor 200 is described as an example in which it is connected to the main control device 70 via the panel relay terminal plate 87, it may be connected to the main control device 70 without the panel relay terminal plate 87. The performance display monitor 200 may be arranged as an internal configuration of the main controller 70.

In addition, in the game board unit 8, the variable starting winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, the second variable winning device 31, and the normal electric auditors solenoid 88, the first big winning opening corresponding to the upstream of the probability variation area, respectively. A solenoid 90, a second special winning opening solenoid 97, and a probability variation area solenoid 99 are provided. These solenoids 88, 90, 97, 99 operate (excite) based on a control signal from the main control CPU 72, and open/close the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, and the second variable winning device 31, respectively ( (Operation) or moving the probability variation region vane member 31d. Control signals are transmitted from the main control CPU 72 to these solenoids 88, 90, 97, 99 by relaying the panel relay terminal plate 87.

In addition, a glass frame opening switch 91 is installed in the integrated door unit 4, and a plastic frame opening switch 93 is installed in the inner frame assembly 7. When the integrated door unit 4 is opened independently, a contact signal from the glass frame opening switch 91 is input to the main control device 70 (main control CPU 72), and the inner frame assembly 7 is opened from the outer frame unit 2. Then, a contact signal from the plastic frame opening switch 93 is input to the main controller 70 (main control CPU 72). The main control CPU 72 can detect the open state of the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 from these contact signals. When the main control CPU 72 detects the open state of the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7, it generates a door open information signal as an external information signal.

A payout control device 92 is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. The payout control device 92 (payout control computer) controls the operation of the above-described payout device unit 172. The payout control device 92 is equipped with a circuit board (payout control board) on which a payout control CPU 94 is mounted. The payout control CPU 94 is also an LSI in which a semiconductor memory such as a ROM 96 and a RAM 98 is integrated together with a CPU core (not shown). It is configured. The payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94) controls the operation of the payout device unit 172 based on the prize ball instruction command from the main control CPU 72, and executes the payout operation of the requested number of game balls. The main control CPU 72 generates a prize ball information signal as an external information signal together with the prize ball instruction command.

In a prize ball case (not shown) of the payout device unit 172, a payout device substrate 100 is installed together with a payout motor 102 (for example, a stepping motor), and a drive circuit for the payout motor 102 is provided on the payout device substrate 100. There is. The payout device substrate 100 specifically controls the rotation angle of the payout motor 102 based on the payout number instruction signal from the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94), and pays out the instructed number of game balls from the prize ball case. Let out. The paid game balls are sent to the saucer unit 6 through the payout flow path in the flow path unit 173.

Further, for example, the payout passage ball cut switch 104 is installed at the upstream position of the prize ball case, and the payout counting switch 106 is installed at the downstream position of the payout motor 102. When a prize ball is actually paid out by driving the payout motor 102, a count signal from the payout counting switch 106 is input to the payout device substrate 100 each time. Further, when a ball break occurs at the upstream position of the prize ball case, a contact signal from the payout path ball break switch 104 is input to the payout device substrate 100. The payout device substrate 100 transmits the input count signal and contact signal to the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94). The payout control CPU 94 can detect the actual number of payouts and the out-of-ball state based on the signal received from the payout device substrate 100.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1, for example, a full tank switch 161 is installed inside the lower plate 6c (position of the back when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1). The prize balls (game balls) actually paid out are discharged to the upper plate 6b through the flow path unit 173, but when the upper plate 6b is filled with the game balls, the game balls further paid out are described above. So that it flows into the lower plate 6c. Further, when the lower plate 6c is filled with game balls, the full tank switch 161 is turned on, and the full tank detection signal is input to the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94). In response to this, even if the payout control CPU 94 receives the prize ball instruction command from the main control CPU 72, the payout ball CPU 94 temporarily suspends the further prize ball operation, and stores the remaining unpaid prize ball number in the RAM 98. The memory of the RAM 98 can be backed up even when the power is cut off, and even if a power failure (including a momentary power failure) occurs during the game, the unpaid prize ball remaining number information is not lost. ..

Further, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, a firing solenoid 110 is installed together with the firing control board 108 (ball firing means). Further, a ball feeding solenoid 111 is provided in the saucer unit 6. The firing control board 108, the firing solenoid 110, and the ball feed solenoid 111 constitute the above-mentioned firing control board set 174. Of these, the firing control board 108 is provided with drive circuits for the firing solenoid 110 and the ball feed solenoid 111. ing. Among them, the ball feed solenoid 111 performs an operation of sending the game balls stored in the saucer unit 6 one by one to a predetermined launch position in the launcher case. In addition, the firing solenoid 110 strikes the game ball sent to the firing position and continuously (intermittently) shoots one game ball toward the game area 8a as described above. The game balls are emitted at intervals of, for example, about 0.6 seconds (100 or less per minute).

On the other hand, the handle unit 16 located on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a firing lever volume 112, a touch sensor 114, and a firing stop switch 116. Of these, the firing lever volume 112 generates an analog signal proportional to the operation amount (so-called stroke) of the firing handle by the player. Further, the touch sensor 114 detects that the player's body is touching the handle unit 16 (shooting handle) from the change in electrostatic capacitance, and outputs the detection signal. Then, the firing stop switch 116 generates a firing stop signal (contact signal) according to the operation of the player.

A launch relay terminal plate 118 is installed in the saucer unit 6, and each signal from the launch lever volume 112, the touch sensor 114, and the launch stop switch 116 is transmitted to the launch control board 108 via the launch relay terminal plate 118. To be done. The drive signal from the firing control board 108 is applied to the ball feeding solenoid 111 via the firing relay terminal board 118. When the player operates the firing handle, an analog signal (may be an encoded digital signal) is generated by the firing lever volume 112 according to the operation amount, and the firing solenoid 110 is driven based on the signal at this time. As a result, the strength with which the game ball is launched is adjusted according to the amount of operation by the player. The drive circuit of the firing control board 108 stops driving the firing solenoid 110 when the detection signal from the touch sensor 114 is off (low level) or when the firing stop signal is input from the firing stop switch 116. To do. In addition to this, the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 120 is connected to the launch relay terminal plate 118, and when the CR unit is not connected to the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 120, the launch control board is also the same. The drive circuit of 108 stops driving the firing solenoid 110.

Further, the saucer unit 6 includes a frequency display board 122 and a lending/returning switch board 123. Of these, the frequency display substrate 122 is provided with a display (3 segment 7-segment LED) of the frequency display unit. Further, switch modules connected to the ball lending button 10 and the return button 12 are mounted on the lending/returning switch board 123, and when the ball lending button 10 or the return button 12 is operated, the operation signal thereof is lent. And it is transmitted from the return switch board 123 to the CR unit via the lending device connection terminal board 120 for gaming balls and the like. In addition, from the CR unit, a frequency signal indicating the remaining frequency of the valuable medium is transmitted to the frequency display board 122 via the lending device connection terminal board 120 for gaming balls and the like. A display circuit (not shown) on the frequency display substrate 122 drives the display device based on the frequency signal to numerically display the remaining frequency of the valuable medium. In addition, when the valuable medium is not loaded into the CR unit or the remaining frequency of the loaded valuable medium becomes 0, the display circuit of the frequency display board 122 drives the display unit to display a demo display (the valuable medium). Can also be displayed).

Further, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a production control device 124 (production control computer) as a control configuration. This effect control device 124 controls the effect associated with the progress of the game in the pachinko machine 1. The effect control device 124 also has an effect control CPU 126, which is a central processing unit, on a circuit board (composite sub-control board). The effect control CPU 126 is configured as an LSI that incorporates a semiconductor memory such as a RAM (RWM) 130 and eDRAM 131 together with a CPU core (not shown). The effect control device 124 is provided at a position covered by the back cover unit 178 on the back side of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition to the above, the effect control device 124 is equipped with various functional components necessary for realizing effects such as the VDP 152, the driver IC 132, and the voice IC 134. Of these, the VDP 152 is a processor for drawing an effect screen reproduced on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. The driver IC 132 is equipped with an IC that controls devices such as the lamps 46 to 52, the panel lamp 53, and the movable body motor 57. Further, the voice IC 134 controls driving of the speakers 54, 55, 56, 58. The internal functional configuration of the effect control device 124 will be described later in detail with reference to the following drawing.

The effect control device 124 and the main control device 70 are connected to each other via, for example, a communication harness (not shown). However, communication between them is performed only in one direction from the main control device 70 to the effect control device 124, and communication in the opposite direction is not performed. The communication harness adopts a parallel format according to the bus width of various production commands (hereinafter, referred to as “production command”) transmitted from the main control device 70 to the production control device 124. Alternatively, the serial format may be adopted according to the hardware configuration of each driver (I/O).

In the present embodiment, the sub connection board 136 is installed on the inner surface of the integrated door unit 4, and drive signals from the driver IC 132 and the audio IC 134 are transmitted via the sub connection board 136 to the various lamps 46 to 52 and the speakers 54, 55,. It is applied to 56 and 58. Further, the sub connection board 136 is connected with a handle lever 62, a button motor 63, a push button 64, and a direction key 66, as well as a volume adjusting switch (not shown). When the player operates these operating members, Is input to the effect control device 124 through the sub connection board 136. Note that, here, an example is shown in which the operation members 62, 64, 66 are connected to the sub connection board 136, but when the saucer decorative board is installed, the operation members 62, 64, 66 are replaced with the saucer decorative board. It may be connected.

The button motor 63 is a stepping motor corresponding to the push button 64, and is driven by an operation unit control device (not shown) that controls the operation unit 60 (switching means). The operation unit control device drives the button motor 63 based on the drive signal transmitted from the effect control device 124, so that the push button 64 is in a normal state (initial position) or a protruding state (maximum movable position). Switch to (change).

In addition, a driver board 138 is installed in the game board unit 8, and a movable body motor 57 is connected to the driver board 138 in addition to the board lamp 53. The movable body motor 57 drives the movable body 40f via, for example, a link mechanism (not shown). The drive signal from the driver IC 132 is applied to the panel lamp 53 and the movable body motor 57 via the driver board 138, respectively.

The liquid crystal display 42 is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8, and its display screen is visible through a substantially rectangular opening formed in the game board unit 8. Further, an inverter board 158 is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8, and this inverter board 158 generates an AC power source that is applied to a backlight (for example, a cold cathode tube) of the liquid crystal display 42.

In addition, a power control unit 162 (power control means) is provided on the back side of the inner frame assembly 7. The power supply control unit 162 incorporates a switching power supply circuit, and when external power (for example, AC24V or the like) is taken from the island facility through the power cord 164, necessary power (for example, DC+34V, +12V or the like) can be generated from the external power. The electric power generated by the power supply control unit 162 is distributed to the main control device 70, the payout control device 92, the effect control device 124, and the inverter board 158. Further, the electric power is supplied to the launch control board 108 via the payout control device 92, and the electric power is supplied to the CR unit via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 120. The low-voltage power for logic (for example, DC+5V) is generated by a power supply IC (three-terminal regulator or the like) built in each device. Further, as described above, the power supply control unit 162 is grounded (grounded) to the island facility through the ground wire 166.

The external terminal board 160 is connected to the payout control device 92, and various external information signals generated by the main control device 70 (main control CPU 72) are transferred from the external terminal board 160 to the outside via the payout control device 92. It will be output to. The main controller 70 (main control CPU 72) and the payout controller 92 (payout control CPU 94) can output an external information signal to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 through the external terminal board 160. The signals output from the external terminal board 160 are totaled by, for example, a hall computer (not shown) in the game arcade. Note that, here, the configuration via the payout control device 92 is taken as an example, but the external information signal may be directly output from the main control device 70 to the external terminal board 160.

[Internal structure of production control device]
FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing a functional configuration inside the effect control device 124.
As described above, the effect control device 124 has a role as an effect control processor that controls effects as the game progresses. Therefore, in addition to the effect control CPU 126, the effect control device 124 is equipped with a control ROM 180 and a watchdog timer IC (WDTIC) 188 required for the effect control device 124 to function as an effect control processor. The control ROM 180 stores a basic program for controlling the effect. The effect control CPU 126 controls the effect by accessing the control ROM 180 via a CPU bus (not shown) and executing a program stored in the control ROM 180. The watchdog timer IC 188 is a timer that monitors whether the control executed by the effect control device 124 is normally performed (whether the processing is completed within the estimated time), and is connected to the reset terminal of the effect control CPU 126. There is. When the signal (clear pulse) for clearing the watch timer of the watchdog timer IC 188 is not input within the predetermined time, the watchdog timer IC 188 outputs a signal (reset pulse) for reset activation to the effect control CPU 126. To do. As a result, the effect control device 124 is forcibly reset and activated.

In addition to these, the production control device 124 also has an SRAM 182 that is a storage area for backup data, a crystal oscillator 181 that generates a clock signal of a predetermined frequency, and a real-time clock (RTC) 184 that manages time, as functions related to production. , A SRAM 182 and a lithium battery 186 for supplying backup power to the real time clock 184, peripheral ICs such as an input/output driver (not shown) and a counter/timer circuit. While the power supply control unit 162 supplies drive power to the effect control device 124, the lithium battery 186 stores the power and charges itself. The SRAM 182 and the real-time clock 184 are connected to the lithium battery 186, and can be driven by the lithium battery 186 when the drive power supply from the power supply control unit 162 to the effect control device 124 is cut off. Therefore, the SRAM 182 and the real-time clock 184 continue to operate until the lithium battery 186 is completely charged (for example, about one and a half months) even when the power supply from the power supply control unit 162 is cut off. The SRAM 182 can hold the stored information for a while even under the power-off condition.

Note that the effect control program is configured to store information regarding security, monitoring, defects, etc., which should not be easily erased, in the SRAM 182. Thus, for example, when some trouble occurs in the performance control device 124, the pachinko machine 1 is collected (or inspected in the installed state) and the cause of the trouble is investigated by analyzing the information held in the SRAM 182. It becomes possible.

Normally, the effect control CPU 126 controls the effect executed according to the program stored in the control ROM 180, as described above, by the devices such as the liquid crystal display 42, the various lamps 46 to 53, the speakers 54, 55, 56 and 58. Control of production using is included. The flow of this effect control can be broadly divided into two stages of "whole control (reproduction instruction)" and "individual control (reproduction control)". The effect control CPU 126 first receives the effect command transmitted from the main control device 70, and indirectly instructs each device to reproduce the effect according to the content of the effect command (overall control). Next, the effect control CPU 126 generates instruction data by converting the instruction content into a more specific expression suitable for each device, and relays between the effect control CPU 126 and each device, the control devices 134, 152, 198, 199. Send to (individual control). As a result, each of the control devices 134, 152, 198, 199 controls each device based on the instruction data, and reproduces the performance using each device in the pachinko machine 1 (screen display, sound output, lamp emission, movable body displacement). Etc.) is realized.

In this way, the effect control CPU 126 has different functions depending on the stage of effect control, and these functions are realized by properly using the resources of the effect control CPU 126. In FIG. 5, the internal resources of the effect control CPU 126 are divided into some functional blocks, and the effect control unit 210, the display control unit 220, the voice control unit 222, the lamp control unit 224, the motor control unit 226, and the input control unit 228. And so on. In the following description, it is assumed that each functional block is treated as an operation subject of control processing.

First, in the stage of overall control, the production control unit 210 in the production control CPU 126 becomes the main subject of operation. At the stage of individual control, the display control unit 220, the sound control unit 222, the lamp control unit 224, the motor control unit 226, or the input control unit 228 in the effect control CPU 126 is the main body of operation according to the device to be controlled. Becomes The effect control unit 210 may directly control the control devices 134, 152, 198, 199 and the like.

The production control device 124 functions as a production control processor in the stage of overall control, but functions as a production reproduction processor in the stage of individual control. Therefore, the effect control device 124 further includes a circuit board (effect display control board) on which the VDP 152 is mounted, a CGROM (image/sound ROM) 190, and a voice IC 134 for controlling various devices used to reproduce the effect. An LED driver 198, an SMC (serial control controller) 199, and a driver IC 132 are provided.

The CGROM 190 stores drawing materials (moving image data) that form the effect screen and audio materials (audio data) that are output as the effect progresses, in a state compressed by a predetermined compression algorithm. The CGROM 190 is connected to the VDP 152 and the voice IC 134 via a CG bus (not shown).

The VDP 152 is a processor dedicated to drawing an effect image, and is integrated into one chip together with the effect control CPU 126. Further, the VDP 152 has a VRAM 156 and a drawing material decoder 157 built therein. Of these, the VRAM 156 is mainly used when decompressing the drawing material, and the drawing material decoder 157 is used when decompressing (decoding) the drawing material in a compressed state. The VDP 152 first analyzes the instruction content transmitted from the display control unit 220, reads the necessary drawing material from the CGROM 190 via the CG bus, and transfers it to the VRAM 156. Then, the read drawing material is decoded by the drawing material decoder 157 to draw an effect image on the VRAM 156, and the effect image is expanded in the frame buffer for each frame (still image per unit time). Reproduction of the effect screen is realized by individually driving each pixel (full color pixel) of the liquid crystal display 42 based on the buffered image data.

The voice IC 134 is a sound generator that generates a sound effect such as a sound effect or BGM that is reproduced during execution of the effect, and is integrated with the effect control CPU 126 in one chip like the VDP 152. The voice IC 134 is connected to an amplifier (not shown), an external DRAM, and a CG bus. Further, the audio IC 134 has a built-in audio material decoder 135 that decompresses (decodes) the compressed audio material. The voice IC 134 first analyzes the instruction content transmitted from the voice control unit 222, and reads out a necessary voice material from the CGROM 190 via the CG bus. Then, the read audio material is decoded on the external DRAM using the audio material decoder 135. By outputting the decoded sound to the glass frame speaker 54, the glass frame speaker 55, the inner frame speaker 56, and the outer frame speaker 58 via the amplifier, audio reproduction of stereo 2ch or monaural 2ch (as a larger number of channels, Good). Further, the voice IC 134 adjusts the output volume of each speaker 54, 55, 56, 58 based on the contact signal input when the volume adjustment switch is operated.

The LED driver 198 controls a lighting pattern and a brightness pattern associated with execution of effects of the various lamps 46 to 53 provided on the front surface side of the pachinko machine 1. In the LED driver 198, the addressing synchronous serial system is adopted. The LED driver 198 first controls the lighting pattern and the brightness pattern based on the instruction content transmitted from the lamp control unit 224, and transfers the drive data corresponding to this to the driver IC 132.

The SMC 199 controls the drive pattern of the movable body motor 57 that is a drive source for the movable body 40f for production provided inside the rendering unit 40. The SMC 199 is also integrated with the effect control CPU 126 in one chip. The SMC199 uses a clock synchronous serial method. The SMC 199 first generates a drive pattern based on the instruction content transmitted from the motor control unit 226, and transfers this to the driver IC 132. Although the SMC 199 is used here only for generating the drive pattern of the motor, the SMC 199 can generate not only the motor but also the lighting pattern and the brightness pattern of the lamp. Therefore, the SMC 199 is applied instead of the LED driver 198 described above. However, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the SMC 199 generates data patterns of both the lamp and the motor.

The driver IC 132 controls the drive voltage applied to the lamp and the motor based on the drive data transferred from the LED driver 198 and the SMC 199. The driver IC 132 includes a switching element such as a PWM (pulse width modulation) IC or MOSFET (not shown), and switches (or switches duty) the drive voltage applied to the various lamps 46 to 53 and the movable body motor 57. By managing the operation, effect reproduction using a lamp or a movable body is realized. In addition to the glass frame top lamp 46 and the glass frame decoration lamps 48, 50, and 52, the various lamps include light sources built in each part of the operation unit 60 and decoration and effect installed in the game board unit 8. The board surface lamp 53 is included. The board lamp 53 corresponds to an LED built in the effect unit 40, an LED built in the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, the second variable winning device 31, and the like. Although the glass frame decorative lamp 52 is connected to the sub connection board 136 here, a saucer decorative board is installed in the saucer unit 6, and the saucer decorative board is installed in the glass frame decorative lamp 52. It may be configured to be connected to the driver IC 132 via.

In addition to this, the driver IC 132 transfers a contact signal input when the operating member such as the handle lever 62 and the push button 64 is operated by the player to the effect control unit 210 via the input control unit 228. The effect control unit 210 appropriately changes the effect content to be reproduced, based on the content of the transferred contact signal.
The above is the configuration example regarding the control of the pachinko machine 1.

[Relationship between set value and winning probability of special symbol lottery]
FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a relationship between the set value and the winning probability of the special symbol lottery.

When the setting value is "1", the winning probability (low probability state) of the special symbol lottery is "1/319".
When the setting value is "2", the winning probability (low probability state) of the special symbol lottery is "1/299".
When the setting value is "3", the winning probability (low probability state) of the special symbol lottery is "1/279".
When the setting value is "4", the winning probability (low probability state) of the special symbol lottery is "1/259".
If the setting value is "5", the winning probability (low probability state) of the special symbol lottery is "1/239".
When the setting value is "6", the winning probability of the special symbol lottery (low probability state) is "1/219".

When the set value is "1" to "6", the winning probability (high probability state) of the special symbol lottery is "1/100".

In this way, the larger the set value, the greater the probability of winning the special symbol lottery (low probability state), and the more advantageous the situation for the player.

In the illustrated example, the winning probability of the special symbol lottery has been described as an example in which the setting difference is provided only in the low probability state, but the setting difference may be provided even in the high probability state. Regarding the setting, not only the big hit probability but also the small hit probability may have a setting difference. Furthermore, setting differences may be provided for other items (for example, the transition rate to the high probability state, the transition rate to the time shortened state, the number of probability changes, the number of time reductions, the number of special variations, etc.).

Subsequently, a control process executed by the main control CPU 72 of the main control device 70 will be described.

[CPU initialization (main) process in main controller]
When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the main control CPU 72 starts CPU initialization processing. The CPU initialization process restores the game state based on the backup information saved at the time of the previous power-off (so-called power restoration), and conversely clears the backup information, thereby resetting the initial state of the pachinko machine 1. It is a process for adjusting. Further, the CPU initialization process is positioned as a main process (main control program) for ensuring stable game operation of the pachinko machine 1 after the adjustment of the initial state.

8 and 9 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the CPU initialization process. The processing performed by the main control CPU 72 will be described below step by step.

Step S100: The main control CPU72 first sets the top address of the stack area in the stack pointer.

Step S102: Subsequently, the main control CPU72 sets the interrupt vector table. In this processing, the main control CPU72 sets the address of the interrupt vector table in the I register (interrupt vector register) used for interrupt control. The interrupt vector table defines the priorities required for controlling interrupt requests generated during execution of the CPU initialization process, and the main control CPU 72 sets the priority order defined in the interrupt vector table. Based on this, a plurality of interrupt requests will be executed in order. The control of the interrupt processing will be described later in detail.

Step S104: The main control CPU72 saves the RAM clear signal (input signal from the RAM clear switch 163). More specifically, the value of the input port to which the RAM clear signal is input is acquired twice consecutively, and the logical sum of these values is saved as the input port value.

Step S106: The main control CPU72 executes a standby process here. In this process, a certain waiting time (for example, about several thousand ms) is secured after the power is turned on, and a power-off warning signal (a signal indicating that the power is shutting down) is checked during that time. It is a thing. Specifically, when the main control CPU 72 sets the loop counter for the waiting time, it decrements the value of the loop counter and bit-checks the input port of the power-off notice signal. The power-off notice signal is input by the IC that monitors the voltage level of the drive voltage. When the input of the power-off notice signal is confirmed before the loop counter reaches 0, the main control CPU 72 restarts the process from the beginning. This makes it possible to protect the system when, for example, turning on and off the main power switch (not shown) is repeatedly performed within a short time (about 1 to 2 seconds).

Step S108: Next, the main control CPU72 permits access to the work area of the RAM76. Specifically, the RAM protection setting value of the work area is reset (00H). As a result, after that, access to the work area of the RAM 76 is permitted.

Step S110: The main control CPU72 refers to the RAM clear signal by checking the specific bit of the input port value saved in the previous step S104, and confirms whether or not the RAM clear switch 163 is operated (switch ON). To do. If the RAM clear switch 163 has not been operated (No), then step S112 is executed.

Step S112: Next, the main control CPU72 confirms whether the backup information is stored in the RAM76, that is, whether the backup validity determination flag is set. If the backup is normally completed by the process executed at the previous power-off and the backup validity determination flag (for example, “A5H”) is set (Yes), the main control CPU72 then executes step S114. The processing executed when the power is cut off will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

Step S114: The main control CPU72 performs a sum check on the backup information of the RAM76. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 performs a thumb check on all areas of the work area of the RAM 76 (user work area including the use prohibited area and the stack area) except the backup validity determination flag and the sum check buffer. If the result of the sum check is normal (Yes), then the main control CPU72 executes step S116.

Step S116: The main control CPU72 clears the stored contents of a partial area of the RAM76. The partial area of the RAM 76 is a work area within a continuous predetermined range based on the address of the backup valid determination flag to be cleared when the power is restored. By clearing the stored contents of this area for each address (in bytes), the valid control information that has been saved is retained as it is, so that the main control CPU 72 can restore the state at the time of power shutdown. (Memory recovery means).

Step S118: The main control CPU72, the production command (command to be transmitted to the production control device 124) and the payout command (should be transmitted to the payout control device 92) for designating the power restoration, which indicates that the system is restored from the power shutdown and activated. Command).

On the other hand, when the RAM clear switch 163 is operated when the power is turned on (step S110: Yes), the backup validity determination flag is not set (step S112: No), or the backup information is not normal. In this case (step S114: No), the main control CPU72 shifts to step S120.

Step S120: The main control CPU72 clears the stored contents of the RAM76 other than the prohibited area. As a result, the work area and stack area of the RAM 76 are all initialized, and even if valid backup information is saved, its contents are erased.
Step S122: Further, the main control CPU72 initializes the RAM76.

Step S124: The main control CPU sets a RAM clear designation effect command (command for the effect control device 124) and a payout command (command for the payout controller 92) indicating that the RAM clear has been activated.

Step S126: Next, the main control CPU72 executes a payout control output process. In this processing, the main control CPU72 outputs to the payout command buffer the payout command (power supply restoration designation) set in step S118 or the payout command (RAM clear designation) set in step S124.

Step S128: The main control CPU72 executes effect control output processing. In this process, the main control CPU72 first outputs the effect command set in step S118 (power supply restoration designation) or the effect command set in step S124 (RAM clear designation) to the effect command buffer. The main control CPU72 further, other various production commands necessary for production control (for example, model designation command, special symbol probability state designation command, special figure destination determination production command, production memory number increase production command, operation memory number decrease). Hour production command, number cut counter remaining number command, special game state designation command, firing position designation command, etc.) are set and these are output to the production command buffer. At this time, the main control CPU72 sets different values for these effect commands when the power is restored and when the RAM is cleared.

For example, when the power is restored, the value of each effect command is set based on the backup information. These effect commands are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect command transmission process (step S142) to be performed later, so that the effect control device 124 causes the effect control device 124 to execute the effect state that was being executed at the time of the previous power-off (for example, the internal state. It is possible to restore the probability state, the display mode of the effect symbol, the effect display mode of the number of working memories, the sound output content, the light emitting state of various lamps, etc.).

Step S130: The main control CPU72 executes an input port process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 acquires the contents of each input port, and stores the result of performing a predetermined calculation on the value in the state flag of each input port. When this process ends, the main control CPU72 then proceeds to step S131 (connection symbol A→A).

Step S131: The main control CPU72 sets the main command permission signal to the specific bit of the output port. The main command permission signal is a signal that indicates to the payout control device 92 that the main control device 70 permits the command transmission to itself. When the main command permission signal is input to the payout control device 92, in response to this, the payout control device 92 inputs a payout command permission signal expressing that the transmission of the payout command is permitted to the main control device 70. Becomes

Step S132: The main control CPU72 resets (OFF) the specific bit of the output port to clear the firing permission signal (specific output information clearing means). The launch permission signal is included in the backup target when the power is cut off. Therefore, when the main controller 70 (pachinko machine 1) returns to the power source, the main control CPU 72 executes the flow when the power source is restored in the CPU initialization process, and the main controller 70 is in the state when the power source is shut off based on the backup information. (Step S116), the firing permission signal is also returned to the state when the power was cut off.

The firing permission signal is set in a specific bit (for example, bit 0) of the specific output port buffer (for example, the buffer for the output port 3) stored in the RAM 76. However, the address of the output port buffer which is the target here is located in the address space of the RAM 76 outside the continuous area which is the target of clearing in step S116. Therefore, if it is attempted to clear the value of the specific bit of the specific address in which the firing permission signal is set in addition to the clear target area as part of the process of step S116, the specific address is specified and then The exceptional process of clearing only the specific bit data of the 8-bit data stored at that address while maintaining the remaining 7-bit data must be performed. The process of clearing the area becomes very inefficient. Under such circumstances, the main control CPU 72 does not clear the emission permission signal in the previous step S116, treats it in the same manner without distinguishing it from other backup target data, and once returns to the state at the time of power shutdown.

However, when the backup information is returned in the main control device 70 (step S116), communication with the payout control device 92 is not yet established, and whether the payout control device 92 is normally activated (main control device). It is not possible to confirm whether or not the instruction from the command from 70 can be accepted). When the power is cut off while the launch permission signal is ON, the launch permission signal is returned to ON, and as a result, the gaming ball can be launched even though the normality of the payout control device 92 is unknown. A condition will occur. Here, if the payout control device 92 is replaced with a modified product that does not conform to the original inspection (for example, the number of prize balls has been modified) while the power is off, the main control device 70 will be replaced by the subsequent power recovery. When the game is started, the shooting permission signal is returned to ON, so that the game ball can be shot. Such a state is not preferable from the viewpoint of security.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, regardless of whether the activation is due to the restoration of the power or the activation of the RAM clear designation, the firing permission signal is explicitly cleared once before the main control CPU 72 transits to the main loop ( It is reset to OFF). After that, when the main control CPU 72 confirms that the payout command permission signal is input from the payout control device 92 to the main control device 70, and then sends the payout command to the payout control device 92, It employs control to set the firing permission signal to ON. By performing such control, even if the game is started (restarted) by the processing of the main loop, the launch of the game ball is not permitted unless the communication between the main control device 70 and the payout control device 92 is established. , It is possible to avoid the illegal launch of the game ball in the case of the illegality as described above.

Step S133: The main control CPU72 sets a timer interrupt period. More specifically, the main control CPU72 sets a value corresponding to the timer interrupt period (for example, 4 ms) in the counter setting register of the timer circuit 194.
Step S134: The main control CPU72 resets the interrupt daisy chain. More specifically, the main control CPU72 executes a RETI instruction after backing up the head address of the main loop, which will be described later, as a preparation for the interrupt processing. By performing this processing, it becomes possible to normally start the interrupt processing that occurs thereafter and to continue the processing from the main loop after the execution of the interrupt processing.

When the above procedure is executed in the CPU initialization process, the main control CPU72 transits to the main loop (steps S136 to S146 described below). As long as the power supply from the power supply control unit 162 is maintained, the main control CPU72 repeatedly executes the main loop.

Step S136, Step S138: The main control CPU72 prohibits the interrupt and then executes the initial value update random number update process. In this process, the main control CPU72 increments the random number for updating (changing) the initial values of various software random numbers. In the present embodiment, various kinds of random numbers except jackpot determination random numbers (hardware random numbers) and hit determination random numbers (hardware random numbers) corresponding to ordinary symbols (for example, jackpot symbol random numbers, reach determination random numbers, fluctuation pattern determination random numbers, etc.) Is generated in the program. These software random numbers are updated by the loop counter within a predetermined range in another timer interrupt process (step S212 in FIG. 12), but the initial value of the loop counter (all The random number does not have to be the target). The initial value updating random number is used to randomly change the initial value, and in step S138, the initial value updating random number is updated. It should be noted that the reason why step S138 is executed after the interrupt is prohibited in step S136 is that the same process is executed in another timer interrupt process (step S210 in FIG. 12 ), and therefore, overlapping with this (competition) ) Is to prevent. In the present embodiment, the big hit determination random number and the hit determination random number are hardware random numbers generated by the random number circuit 75, and the update cycle thereof is faster than the timer interrupt cycle (for example, several ms) (for example, several μs). Therefore, it is not necessary to update the big hit determination random number and the initial value of the hit determination random number. The timer interrupt process will be described later with reference to another drawing.

Step S140: The main control CPU72 executes a received command management process. In this process, the data received from the payout control device 92 is analyzed, and the process according to the result is performed. When the received command is the payout activation designation command, the main control CPU72 outputs the payout activation confirmation designation command to the payout command buffer, while otherwise the received data is a value within a predetermined range (reception command If it is out of the range, the payout error designation command is output to the effect command buffer, and the payout radio wave error flag is set according to the situation.

Step S142: The main control CPU72 executes effect command transmission processing. In this process, the main control CPU72 sends each effect command output to the effect command buffer to the effect control device 124.

Step S144, Step S146: The main control CPU72 permits the interrupt and executes other random number updating processing. The random numbers updated in this process are random numbers (reach determination random numbers, fluctuation pattern determination random numbers, etc.) that do not relate to the determination of the winning type (winning type) among the software random numbers. This processing is performed in the remaining time when an interrupt request is generated during execution of the main loop and the main control CPU 72 executes various interrupt processing. The details of the interrupt process will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

[Evacuation processing at power off]
Next, a process executed when the power is cut off (hereinafter, abbreviated as “power cut”) will be described. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the saving process when the power is cut off. In the main controller 70, the occurrence of power interruption and the occurrence of reset are monitored by the same monitoring IC (for example, IC mounted in a reset controller (not shown)). The monitoring IC monitors the drive voltage supplied from the power supply control unit 162, and outputs a power-off notice signal to the XINT terminal of the parallel I/O port 79 when the voltage level falls below the reference voltage. The main control CPU72 executes a power-off saving process (XINT interrupt process, backup means) triggered by the input of a power-off notice signal to the XINT terminal (XINT interrupt). Hereinafter, each procedure of the power-off save processing will be described.

Steps S150 and S152: The main control CPU72 reads the power-off detection switch input port of the parallel I/O port 79, checks a specific bit, and confirms whether or not the power-off notice signal is detected. If it cannot be confirmed that the power-off notice signal is detected (No), the main control CPU 72 permits the interrupt, terminates the power-off evacuation process, and terminates the main loop of the CPU initialization process (FIGS. 8 to 9). Return to the program address indicated by the stack pointer). On the other hand, when confirming that the power-off notice signal is detected (Yes), the main control CPU72 proceeds to the next step S154.

Step S154: The main control CPU72, in addition to the output ports corresponding to the ordinary electric auditors solenoid 88, the first big winning opening solenoid 90, the second big winning opening solenoid 97, the probability variation region solenoid 99, test signal terminals and command control Clear the output port buffer corresponding to the signal.

Steps S156 and S158: Next, the main control CPU72 adds the entire contents of the work area of the RAM76 excluding the backup validity determination flag and the sum check buffer in 1-byte units, and repeats until the addition is completed for all areas. ..
Step S160: When the sum calculation is completed for all the areas (step S158: Yes), the main control CPU72 stores the sum result value in the sum check buffer.

Step S162: Next, the main control CPU72 stores a valid value in the backup validity determination flag area.
Step S164: Further, the main control CPU72 stores "00H" indicating access prohibition in the protect value of the RAM76, and prohibits access to the work area (including the use prohibition area and the stack area) of the RAM76.

Step S166: The main control CPU72 sets in the loop counter a predetermined value for counting the number of times the power-off notice signal is checked.
Step S168: The main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the power-off notice signal is detected. The method of confirming the power-off notice signal is the same as the method in step S150 described above. When confirming that the power-off notice signal is detected (Yes), the main control CPU72 returns to the previous step S166 again. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the power-off warning signal is detected (No), the main control CPU72 proceeds to the next step S170.

Step S170: The main control CPU72 decrements the value of the loop counter by one.
Step S172: The main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the value of the loop counter is "0". When it is not possible to confirm that the value of the loop counter is “0” (No), the main control CPU72 returns to step S168. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the value of the loop counter is “0” (Yes), the main control CPU72 proceeds to step S174.
Step S174: The main control CPU72 shifts from the power-off save processing to the CPU initialization processing (FIG. 8). At this time, since the RETI instruction is not executed before shifting to the CPU initialization process, the CPU initialization process can be started in a state where other interrupts are prohibited.

The above-described processing of steps S166 to S172 is, so to speak, a standby processing (follow-up observation processing) executed in preparation for interruption of the power supply from the power supply control unit 162. When the power-off warning signal is continuously detected, steps S166 to S168 are repeatedly executed, so that the loop counter never becomes "0". Therefore, the standby state will continue as long as the power supply continues. On the other hand, when the power-off notice signal is detected temporarily (for example, due to a momentary power failure or the like), steps S168 to S172 are repeatedly executed, and the loop counter is decremented as time passes. Then, when it becomes “0”, the CPU initialization process is started. In other words, the main control CPU72 first calculates the checksum and saves the result before the power supply is completely cut off, and enters the standby state, and under the situation where the power supply is being cut off, other processing is performed. The CPU is initialized in a situation where stable power supply is restored after a temporary power failure, while the standby state is maintained without execution and the power supply is shut down in a safe state. The processing is shifted to and the main processing is restarted. By executing such a standby process, it becomes possible to guarantee a stable game operation of the main controller 70 and by extension, the pachinko machine 1.

When the power supply from the power supply control unit 162 is cut off, the power supply source to the main control device 70 is automatically switched to the backup power supply. After power failure, the main control device 70 is supplied with backup power from a backup power supply circuit (not shown) (for example, a circuit including a capacitive element mounted in the main control device 70). It is retained without loss even after the power is turned off. The backup power supply circuit may be incorporated in the power supply control unit 162, for example.

Through the above processing, all the information stored in the work area of the RAM 76 to be backed up (sum addition target) is retained as storage in the RAM 76 even after the power is turned off. In addition, the retained storage is restored as backup information at the time of power failure after confirming the normal checksum in the CPU initialization process (FIG. 8).

[Command reception interrupt processing]
Next, a process executed when a command is received from the payout control device 92 will be described. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the command reception interrupt process. The payout control device 92 transmits a command for payout activation designation indicating that the payout of game balls has been started to the main control device 70, and various devices related to the payout of prize balls as the game progresses (for example, The command transmitted from the dispensing device substrate 100, the full switch 161 and the like) to the main control device 70 is relayed. These commands transmitted by the payout controller 92 are received by the reception data register of the specific channel of the serial communication circuit 196 of the main controller 70. The main control CPU72 executes the command reception interrupt process (SCU interrupt process) triggered by the command reception (SCU interrupt). Hereinafter, each procedure of the command reception interrupt process will be described.

Step S180: First, the main control CPU72 saves the values of the A register (accumulator) and the F register (flag register) used during the execution of the main loop to the save area of the RAM 76. After saving the value, another value can be written in each register during the data reception interrupt process.

Step S182: Next, the main control CPU72 checks the specific bit of the status register to confirm whether or not there is data in the reception data register (reception FIFO). When it is confirmed that there is data in the reception data register (Yes), the main control CPU72 proceeds to the next step S184. On the other hand, when it is not possible to confirm that there is data in the reception data register (No), the main control CPU72 executes step S186.
Step S184: The main control CPU72 stores the contents of the data register in the received command buffer.

Steps S186 and S188: The main control CPU72 restores the values of the A and F registers saved in step S180 to the respective registers, permits the interrupt, and then terminates the command reception interrupt process and executes the CPU initialization process. Return to the main loop (Fig. 9).

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the timer interrupt process. The main control CPU72 executes a timer interrupt process (PTC interrupt process) every predetermined time (for example, several ms) based on an interrupt request (PTC interrupt) output by the timer circuit 194. Hereinafter, each procedure of the timer interrupt process will be described.

Step S200: First, the main control CPU72 stores the values of the AF register (pair of accumulator and flag register) and BC, DE, HL register (pair of general-purpose register) used during execution of the main loop in the save area of the RAM76. Evacuate. After saving the value, another value can be written in each register in the process of the timer interrupt processing.

Step S202: Next, the main control CPU72 permits an interrupt. By permitting the interrupt here, another interrupt can be generated while executing the steps subsequent to the timer interrupt process. As described above, multiple interrupts are permitted in the timer interrupt process. Note that the interrupt controller 192 executes acceptance of interrupt request signals, priority control of multiple interrupts, and the like. The interrupt management by the interrupt controller 192 will be described later.

Step S204: The main control CPU72 executes a dynamic port output process. In this process, in order to control the lighting of each lamp mounted on the integrated display substrate 89 by the dynamic lighting method, port output is performed in common units. More specifically, the main control CPU72 clears the output port and then stores the content output to the common output request buffer corresponding to the selected common in the output port.

Step S206: The main control CPU72 executes a port input process. In this process, in order to accurately obtain the latest switch state based on the input port information, the main control CPU 72 logically ANDs the input values of various switch signals from the parallel I/O port 79 and the inversion result value of the previous input value. Is stored in the input port on detection flag. As a result, the value of the input port ON detection flag (ON/OFF) makes it possible to grasp an accurate input state in consideration of changes in various switch signals from the previous time. Specifically, the various switch signals include passage detection signals from the gate switch 78 and the probability variation area switch 95, a middle start winning opening switch 80, a right starting winning opening switch 82, a first count switch 84, and a second count switch. The winning detection signals from 85, the first winning opening switch 86, and the second winning opening switch 81 are included.

Step S208: The main control CPU72 executes a timer updating process. In this processing, the main control CPU 72 subtracts 1 from and updates counters such as timers for managing game time and closing time of ordinary electric auditors, as well as various timers for external information and timers for security signals.

Step S210: The main control CPU72 also executes the initial value updating random number updating process here. The content of the process is the same as that described in the process of the CPU initialization process (step S138 in FIG. 9).

Step S212: The main control CPU72 executes a winning symbol random number updating process. In this processing, the main control CPU72 updates the value of the counter for generating various random numbers for lottery of special symbols and normal symbols. The value of each counter is incremented in the counter area of the RAM 76 and each loops within a specified range. Various random numbers include, for example, a big hit symbol random number and the like.

Step S214: Next, the main control CPU72 executes a switch input event process. In this process, of the switch signals input in the previous port input process (step S206), the gate switch 78, the middle start winning opening switch 80, the right starting winning opening switch 82, the first count switch 84, the second count switch 85. Based on the winning detection signals from the first winning opening switch 86 and the second winning opening switch 81, the event that occurred during the game is determined, and another process is executed according to the event that occurred. The specific contents of the switch input event process will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

In the present embodiment, when a winning detection signal (ON) is input from the middle start winning opening switch 80 or the right starting winning opening switch 82, the main control CPU 72 causes the internal lottery corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol, respectively. It is determined that the event that triggers (the trigger for the lottery) has occurred. Further, when the passage detection signal (ON) is input from the gate switch 78, the main control CPU72 determines that an event that triggers the lottery corresponding to the normal symbol has occurred. When determining that any of the events has occurred, the main control CPU72 executes processing according to each of the occurring events. The process executed when the winning detection signal is input from the middle start winning opening switch 80 or the right starting winning opening switch 82 will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

Step S215: The main control CPU72 executes a setting change process (setting related process). In this process, a process associated with changing or confirming the set value is executed. If the setting is not changed or the setting is confirmed, that is, if the game is possible, the main control CPU 72 skips this step (without executing the setting change process) and calculates the base instead. Then, the process of displaying on the performance display monitor 200 can be executed. The main control CPU72, the number of prize balls paid out by entering the game ball into each winning opening (starting winning opening, normal winning opening, big winning opening), the number of out showing the number of gaming balls shot into the game area The base can be calculated by dividing by (the number of game balls detected by the out switch).

When the setting change process (setting-related process) is executed in this step, the main control CPU72 generates a setting-related end designation command. Here, the "setting-related end designation command" is an effect command that conveys the end of the processing related to the change or confirmation of the setting, and the setting-related end designation command includes other setting value information. Can be included. The generated setting-related end designation command is transmitted to the performance control device 124 in the performance command transmission processing (step S142 in FIG. 9) executed in the main loop.

Step S216, Step S218: The main control CPU72 executes a special symbol game process and a normal symbol game process. These processes are for specifically advancing the game in the pachinko machine 1. Among them, in the special symbol game processing (step S216), the main control CPU72 controls the execution of the internal lottery corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol described above, the first special symbol display device 34 and the The variable display and the stop display by the 2 special symbol display device 35 are determined, and the operation of the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 is controlled according to the display result. The details of the special symbol game processing will be described later using another flowchart.

Further, in the normal symbol game processing (step S218), the main control CPU72 determines the variable display and the stop display by the normal symbol display device 33 described above, and operates the variable start winning device 28 according to the display result. To control. For example, the main control CPU72 stores the random number (ordinary symbol determination random number) acquired upon the passage of the starting gate 20 in the previous switch input event process (step S204), and in this ordinary symbol game process Then, the random number value is read from the memory and it is determined whether or not it falls within a predetermined hit range (operation lottery execution means). When the random number falls within the hit range, the normal symbol display device 33 variably displays the normal symbol and performs a stop display of the normal symbol in a predetermined hit mode, and then the main control CPU 72 turns on the normal electric accessory solenoid 88. The variable start winning device 28 is excited to operate (movable piece operating means). On the other hand, if the random number value is out of the hit range, the main control CPU72 performs the stop display of the normal symbol in a mode that is out of alignment after the variable display.

Step S220: Next, the main control CPU72 executes a state management process. In this processing, the main control CPU72 is collected in the abnormal winning frequency (a state in which the number of balls entering the medium starting winning opening 26 and the normal winning openings 22 and 24 is abnormally large) and the base abnormality (the back side of the game board unit 8). The number of game balls, that is, the total number of winning balls to each winning hole 22, 24, 26, 28a, 30b, 31b is larger than the number of playing balls in the game area 8a) Check if a high condition has occurred. When the abnormal state is detected, the main control CPU72 has caused an abnormality by outputting a security signal to the hall computer in the game hall and by transmitting a predetermined effect control command to the effect control device 124. Notify that.

Step S222: The main control CPU72 executes a winning opening switch process. In this process, when each input port ON detection flag stored based on the winning detection signals input from the various switches 80, 81, 82, 84, 85, 86 in the previous port input process (step S206) is ON, The target prize ball control counters are incremented by 1 and updated.

Step S224: The main control CPU72 executes a prize ball payout process. Although a detailed flow is not shown, in this process, the main control CPU72 first confirms whether or not the payout command buffer is empty (whether the payout command to be transmitted is set), and determines that the payout command buffer is not empty (the payout command is If it is set), the various payout commands output to the payout command buffer are transmitted to the payout control device 92. For example, the payout command indicating the startup mode at power-on is set in the course of the CPU initialization process (steps S118 and S124 in FIG. 8) and output to the payout command buffer (step S126 in FIG. 8). However, a payout command indicating this start mode is transmitted here. On the other hand, if the payout command buffer is empty, the process proceeds to a process for instructing payout of prize balls. The main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the prize ball control counter is not 0. If the prize ball control counter is not 0, the payout controller 92 issues a payout command for designating a prize ball for instructing the number of prize balls corresponding to this counter. Send to. More specifically, a payout command designating a prize ball corresponding to each prize ball control counter updated in the previous step S222 is transmitted here. In the transmission of the payout command, the payout command permission signal is input from the payout control device 92 to the main control device 70, and the number of payout commands set in the transmission data register (transmission FIFO) is a predetermined number. When it is less than (more specifically, when the payout command set in the transmission FIFO in step S224 executed before the previous time has already been transmitted, or is currently being transmitted and the transmission FIFO has an empty space) ) Is executed only.

Further, particularly in step S224 when the power is turned on, when the payout command set in the course of the CPU initialization process is normally transmitted, the main control CPU72 turns on the firing permission signal in response to this. Specifically, the main control CPU72 clears the payout command buffer output when the power is turned on, and turns on the firing permission signal by setting the specific bit of the output port (specific output information setting means). As a result, after confirming the normal operation after the power is turned on, the launch of the game ball is permitted, and the launch enable signal is sent to the launch control board 108 via the payout control device 92, whereby the game ball can be launched. It becomes a state.

In the prize ball payout process, the main control CPU72 outputs a prize ball content command for transmitting the content of the number of prize balls to the effect control device 124. When the winning detection signal is input from the first count switch 84 or the second count switch 85 corresponding to the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31, it corresponds to the first profit (15 game balls). Generate a prize ball content command. When a winning detection signal is input from the second winning opening switch 81 corresponding to the normal winning opening 24, a prize ball content command corresponding to the second profit (10 game balls) is generated. The prize ball content command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in a port output process (step S236) described later.

[About the number of prize balls and the number of game balls acquired]
The number of prize balls at the starting opening of the first special symbol and the number of prize balls at the starting opening of the second special symbol are each set to one or more specified numbers. Further, the number of prize balls may be different between the starting opening of the first special symbol and the starting opening of the second special symbol. Furthermore, based on the winning probability of the special symbol and the expected value of the total number of game balls (the average number of balls that can be obtained during the series from the first hit to the end of the time reduction state), the minimum number of prize balls You may. Furthermore, the winning probability of the special symbol, the expected value of the total number of game balls acquired, the number of times the big winning opening is opened, the opening time of the big winning opening, the maximum number of winnings of the big winning opening, and the number of prize balls of the big winning opening are predetermined. If the conditions are satisfied, a big hit may be set in which the number of game balls obtained by one big hit is less than 1/4 of the maximum number of game balls obtained.

Step S226: The main control CPU72 executes a firing position designation process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 first sets the firing position designation flag to the previous firing position designation flag, and then clears the firing position designation flag. Then, the main control CPU72 turns on the firing position designation flag if the variable winning device is in operation or the time reduction function is in operation, and the firing position designation flag and the previous firing position designation flag match. If not, a firing position designation command is generated. The generated firing position designation command is transmitted to the performance control device 124 in the performance command transmission process (step S142 in FIG. 9) executed in the main loop.

Step S228: Next, the main control CPU72 executes external information processing. In this processing, the main control CPU 72 outputs an external information signal (for example, prize ball information, door opening information, symbol determination frequency information, big hit information, starting opening information, etc.) to the hall computer of the game hall through the external terminal board 160. Store in the request buffer.

In this embodiment, among various external information signals, for example, by outputting “big hit 1” to “big hit 5” as the big hit information to the outside, an external electronic device (data display) connected to the pachinko machine 1 is displayed. Equipment and hall computer) can provide various jackpot information (external information signal output means). That is, the jackpot information is divided into a plurality of “jackpots 1” to “jackpots 5” and output, so that the type (winning type) of jackpots can be aggregated and managed by a hall computer (not shown) from these combinations, or internally. Recognize changes in probability state (low probability state or high probability state) or shortened symbol fluctuation time, or generate a small hit (a condition device does not work) that is not classified as a "big hit" even if not winning It is possible to aggregate and manage. Also, based on the jackpot information, for example, a data display device (not shown) counts and displays the number of jackpot occurrences within the past few business days for each pachinko machine 1, and recognizes whether each jackpot is currently in the jackpot. Alternatively, it is possible to recognize whether or not each symbol is currently in a shortened symbol variation time. In this external information processing, the main control CPU 72 controls the output states (ON or OFF set) of "big hit 1" to "big hit 5" in detail.

Step S230: Further, the main control CPU72 executes the test signal processing. In this processing, the main control CPU72 indicates various internal states (for example, a normal symbol game management state, a special symbol game management state, a launch position designation, a big hit, a probability variation function operation, a time reduction function operation) Generate test signals and store them in the port output request buffer. With this test signal, for example, the internal state of the main control CPU 72 can be tested outside the main control device 70.

Step S232: Next, the main control CPU72 executes a display output management process. In this process, the main control CPU72 is a normal symbol display device 33, the normal symbol working memory lamp 33a, the first special symbol display device 34, the second special symbol display device 35, the first special symbol working memory lamp 34a, the second special symbol Processing necessary for managing the lighting states of the working memory lamp 35a, the game state display device 38, etc. is performed. Specifically, in a mode corresponding to the variable display and the stop display of the symbols determined in the special symbol game process (step S216) and the normal symbol game process (step S218), the operation memory number display, the game state display, and the like. The drive signal for lighting each lamp is stored as byte data in the port output request buffer for each common.

The byte data stored in the port output request buffer for each common is sequentially stored in the output port one common at a time in the dynamic port output process (step S204) every time the timer interrupt process occurs. Is output. For example, in the next timer interrupt process, the byte data stored for common 1 is output to the port, and in the timer interrupt process to be executed next time, the byte data stored for common 2 is output to the port. , Byte data stored in the port output request buffer for each common are processed one by one in order. With this, each lamp constituting a predetermined display mode (a mode in which a variable display or a stop display of a symbol, a display of the number of operating memories, a game state display, etc.) is sequentially driven in a common unit, and the lighting is controlled by a dynamic lighting system. Will be.

Step S234: Further, the main control CPU72 executes a solenoid output management process. In this processing, the main control CPU 72 drives the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 88, the first special winning opening solenoid 90, the second special winning opening solenoid 97, and the probability variation region solenoid 99 stored in the port output request buffer. , Test signals, etc. are also stored in the port output request buffer.

Step S236: The main control CPU72 executes a port output process. In this processing, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether a value is stored in each output buffer (port output request buffer), and if the value is stored, outputs it to the port. For example, the drive signals of the solenoids 88, 90, 97, 99 stored in the port output request buffer in the previous step S234 are output to the ports. In this case, each drive signal is transmitted to the corresponding solenoid 88, 90, 97, 99, and each solenoid can be caused to operate in accordance with the drive signal.

In addition, in the present embodiment, an example in which the processing (game control program module) of steps S216 to S236 is executed as a part of the timer interrupt processing is described, but these processing are incorporated into the main loop of the CPU and executed. There are also known programming examples.

Step S238: The control CPU 72 restores the values of the HL, DE, BC, and AF registers saved in step S200 to each register, terminates the timer interrupt process, and enters the main loop of the CPU initialization process (FIG. 9). Return.

[Interrupt management by interrupt controller]
As described above, in the main control device 70, during execution of the CPU initialization process (FIG. 8), which is the main control program, the parallel parallel which is the source of the XINT interrupt (power-off save process (FIG. 10)) is executed. Interrupt request output by I/O port 79), SCU interrupt (interrupt request output by serial communication circuit 196 which is the basis of command reception interrupt processing (FIG. 11)), PTC interrupt (timer interrupt) An interrupt request output by the timer circuit 194 which is the source of the interrupt process (FIG. 12) may occur. These interrupt requests are managed/controlled by the interrupt controller 192 installed in the main controller 70. The interrupt controller 192 permits reception of an interrupt request by an interrupt permission command (EI command) of the main control CPU 72 and prohibits reception of an interrupt request by an interrupt prohibition command (DI command), a so-called maskable interrupt. Control of.

The XINT interrupt, the SCU interrupt, and the PTC interrupt all occur based on independent occurrence factors that have no interdependence, so it is naturally possible that a plurality of interrupt requests occur at the same time. Therefore, the interrupt controller 192 controls each interrupt request in accordance with a predetermined priority order of interrupt requests in consideration of importance of interrupt processing, processing efficiency, and the like.

More specifically, the priority order of the interrupt request (interrupt processing) is defined in the interrupt vector table, the XINT interrupt (saving processing at power off) has the lowest priority, and the SCU interrupt (command Receiving interrupt processing) has the highest priority. By setting the interrupt vector table at the beginning of the CPU initialization process (step S102 in FIG. 8), the interrupt controller 192 can perform priority control of interrupt requests generated at subsequent timings. .. Actually, after the CPU initialization process transits to the main loop (steps S136 to S146 in FIG. 9), the interrupt is permitted (step S144 in FIG. 9) until the interrupt is prohibited (see FIG. 9. If any interrupt request occurs during step S136) in 9, the interrupt controller 192 controls the accepted interrupt request based on the priority set in the interrupt vector table. For example, when an XINT interrupt and a PTC interrupt are accepted at the same time, a PTC interrupt with a higher priority (timer interrupt process) is processed first. While the timer interrupt process is being executed, the XINT interrupt is in an interrupt waiting state, and after the timer interrupt process is completed, the save process at power-off is executed.

Also, when checking again the procedure example of each interrupt processing, in the power-off saving processing (FIG. 10) and the command reception interrupt processing (FIG. 11), just before returning from each interrupt processing (RETI command) While the interrupt is permitted for the first time (immediately before executing the step) (step S152 in FIG. 10, step S188 in FIG. 11), the interrupt is interrupted at the beginning of the interrupt process in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12). Is permitted (step S202 in FIG. 12), and then the main steps are executed. That is, the interrupt controller 192 (main control CPU 72) prohibits execution of multiple interrupts during execution of the power-off evacuation processing and command reception interrupt processing, while it executes multiple interrupts during execution of the timer interrupt processing. It is allowed to be executed.

By thus controlling the interrupt request based on the priority order, the interrupt controller 192 enables the main controller 70 to execute multiple interrupts.

[Switch input event processing]
FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the switch input event process (step S214 in FIG. 12). Hereinafter, each procedure will be described.

Step S10: The main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the winning detection signal is input (the lottery trigger is generated) from the middle start winning opening switch 80 corresponding to the first special symbol. When the input of this winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU72 proceeds to the next step S12 to execute the first special symbol memory update process. The specific contents of the processing will be described later with reference to another flowchart. On the other hand, when the winning detection signal is not input (No), the main control CPU72 proceeds to step S14.

Step S14: Next, the main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the winning detection signal is input (the lottery trigger is generated) from the right starting winning opening switch 82 corresponding to the second special symbol. When the input of this winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU72 proceeds to the next step S16 and executes the second special symbol memory updating process. In this case as well, the details of the specific processing will be described later using another flowchart. On the other hand, when the winning detection signal is not input (No), the main control CPU72 proceeds to step S18.

Step S18: The main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the winning detection signal is input from the first count switch 84 corresponding to the first big winning opening of the first variable winning device 30. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU72 proceeds to the next step S20 to execute the first special winning opening counting process. In the first big winning hole counting process, the main control CPU72 counts the number of winning balls to the first variable winning device 30 for each round during the big hit game. On the other hand, when the winning detection signal is not input (No), the main control CPU72 proceeds to step S21a.

Step S21a: The main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the winning detection signal is input from the second count switch 85 corresponding to the second big winning opening of the second variable winning device 31. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU72 proceeds to the next step S21b to execute the second special winning opening counting process. In the second big winning opening counting process, the main control CPU72 counts the number of winning balls to the second variable winning device 31 during the big hit game. On the other hand, when the winning detection signal is not input (No), the main control CPU72 proceeds to step S22.

Step S22: The main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the passage detection signal is input from the gate switch 78 corresponding to the normal symbol. When the input of the passage detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU72 proceeds to the next step S24 to execute the normal symbol memory update process. In the normal symbol memory update process, the main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the current normal symbol working memory number is less than the upper limit number (for example, four), and if it does not reach the upper limit number, acquires a normal random number per symbol. To do. Further, the main control CPU72 normally increments the symbol working memory number by one. Then, the main control CPU72 stores the acquired normal symbol per random value in the random number storage area of the RAM76. On the other hand, when the winning detection signal is not input (No), the main control CPU72 proceeds to step S26.

Step S26: The main control CPU72 confirms whether or not a detection signal is input from the probability variation area switch 95 corresponding to the probability variation area provided inside the second variable winning device 31. When the input of this detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU72 proceeds to the next step S28 to execute the probability variation region passing process. As the probability variation area passage processing, the main control CPU72 executes processing for setting the value (01H) of the probability variation function operation flag as a game state flag in the flag area of the RAM76 (high probability state transition means, probability variation function operation means). , Advantageous game state transition means, special state transition means). This probability variation function operation flag is reset when the special symbol fluctuates a predetermined number of times (170 times) without obtaining a winning result after the end of the big hit game. Further, as the probability variation area passage processing, the main control CPU 72 generates a probability variation area passage command. The probability variation area passage command is transmitted to the performance control device 124 in the performance command transmission processing (step S142 in FIG. 9) executed in the main loop. The main control CPU 72 may execute the probability variation area passage process only within a specific effective time (for example, during the time when the probability variation area solenoid 99 is operated during the big hit game). On the other hand, when the detection signal is not input (No), the main control CPU72 returns to the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12).

[First special symbol memory update process]
FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of the first special symbol memory update processing (step S12 in FIG. 13). Hereinafter, the procedure of the first special symbol memory update processing will be described step by step.

Step S30: Here, first, the main control CPU72 refers to the value of the first special symbol working memory number counter, and confirms whether the working memory number is less than the maximum value (for example, 4). The working memory number counter represents the number (group number) of the big hit determination random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the like stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. Here, the random number storage area of the RAM 76 is divided into eight sections (for example, 2 bytes each) that are commonly used by the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and each section has a jackpot determination random number and a jackpot symbol. It is possible to store one random number as a set. At this time, if the value of the working memory number counter corresponding to the first special symbol has reached the maximum value (No), the main control CPU72 returns to the switch input event process (FIG. 13). On the other hand, if the value of the working memory number counter is less than the maximum value (Yes), the main control CPU72 proceeds to the next step S31.

Step S31: The main control CPU72 adds one to the first special symbol working memory number. The first special symbol working memory number counter is stored in, for example, the working memory number area of the RAM 76, and the main control CPU 72 increments (+1) the value. Based on the value of the counter added here, the lighting state of the first special symbol working memory lamp 34a is controlled in the display output management process (step S232 in FIG. 12).

Step S32: Then, the main control CPU72 acquires the jackpot determination random number value corresponding to the first special symbol from the random number circuit 75 (first lottery element acquisition means, lottery element acquisition means). The random number value is obtained by designating the pin address of the random number circuit 75. When the main control CPU 72 performs 8-bit processing, address designation is performed twice, one byte for each of upper and lower bits. When the main control CPU 72 reads the jackpot determination random number value from the designated address, it saves it as the jackpot determination random number corresponding to the first special symbol in the transfer destination address.

Step S33: Next, the main control CPU72 acquires the big hit symbol random number value corresponding to the first special symbol from the big hit symbol random number counter area of the RAM76. The acquisition of this random number value is also performed by designating the address of the jackpot symbol random number counter area. When the main control CPU 72 reads the big hit symbol random number value from the designated address, it saves it as the big hit symbol random number corresponding to the first special symbol in the transfer destination address.

Step S34: Further, the main control CPU72 sequentially obtains the reach determination random number and the variation pattern determination random number from the variation random number counter area of the RAM76 as the random value relating to the variation condition of the first special symbol (variation pattern determination element acquisition). Means, element acquisition means). Similarly, the acquisition of these random number values is performed by designating the address of the varying random number counter area. Then, the main control CPU72, when each of the reach determination random number and the variation pattern determination random number is acquired from the designated address, saves these to the transfer destination address.

Step S35: The main control CPU72 transfers the big hit determination random number, the big hit symbol random number, the reach judgment random number, and the fluctuation pattern determining random number that are saved to the random number storage area corresponding to the first special symbol, and these random numbers are empty sections in the area. And store them as a set (storage means, lottery element storage means). The plurality of sections are set in order (for example, first to fourth), and if all the first to fourth sections are empty at this stage, the random numbers are stored in order from the first section. Alternatively, if the first section is already filled and the other second to fourth sections are empty, each random number is stored in order from the second section. The reading of the random number storage area is in the FIFO (First In First Out) format.

Step S36: Next, the main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the current special game management status (game state) is a big hit. If it is not during the big hit (No), the main control CPU72 executes the following steps S37, S38. If it is a big hit (Yes), the main control CPU72 skips steps S37 and S38 and proceeds to step S38a. The reason for making this determination in the present embodiment is that the effect due to pre-reading is not performed for the ball entered during the big hit.

Step S37: In the case other than during the big hit (step S36: No), the main control CPU72 executes the acquisition time effect determination process for the first special symbol. This process determines the result of the internal lottery in advance (before the start of fluctuation) based on the jackpot determination random number and the jackpot symbol random number of the first special symbol respectively acquired in the previous steps S32 to S34, and thereby the effect contents It is for making a judgment (so-called “look-ahead”). The details of the specific processing will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

Step S38: When returning from the production effect determination processing at the time of acquisition, the main control CPU72 next sets the upper byte portion (for example, "B8H") of the special figure destination determination effect command for the first special symbol. This upper byte data describes that the command type is “for special figure destination determination effect regarding the first special symbol”. Since the lower byte portion of the special figure destination determination effect command is set in the previous acquisition effect determination process (step S37), here, by combining the lower byte with the upper byte, for example, a command of one word length Will be generated.

Step S38a: Next, the main control CPU72 sets the working memory number increase effect command for the first special symbol. Specifically, with respect to the preceding value (for example, "BBH") of the upper byte indicating the type of command, the number of working memories after the increase (for example, "01H" to "04H") is added to the lower byte of one word length. Generate a performance command. At this time, with respect to the lower byte, by setting the second digit to "0" by default, the value is "result (change information) due to increase in the number of working memories". That is, if the lower byte is “01H”, it indicates that the number of working memories this time is “01H” as a result of incrementing the number of working memories “00H” up to the previous time by one. Similarly, if the lower byte is "02H" to "04H", it is increased by one from the previous number of working memories "01H" to "03H", and as a result, the number of working memories this time is "02H" to "03H". 04H” is displayed. The preceding value "BBH" is a value indicating that the effect command this time is the operation memory number command for the first special symbol.

Step S39: Then, the main control CPU72 executes the effect command output setting process for the first special symbol. This process is for transmitting the special figure destination determination effect command generated in the previous step S38, the operation memory number increase effect effect command generated in step S38a, and the starting mouth winning sound control command to the effect control device 124. It is a thing.
Then, when the above processing is finished, the main control CPU72 returns to the switch input event processing (FIG. 13).

[Second special symbol memory update process]
Next, FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the second special symbol memory update processing (step S16 in FIG. 13). Hereinafter, the procedure of the second special symbol memory update processing will be described step by step.

Step S40: The main control CPU72 refers to the value of the second special symbol working memory number counter, and confirms whether the working memory number is less than the maximum value. Similarly to the second special symbol operation memory number counter, it also represents the number (set number) of the big hit determination random number, the big hit symbol random number, etc. stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. At this time, if the value of the second special symbol working memory number counter has reached the maximum value (for example, 4) (No), the main control CPU72 returns to the switch input event process (FIG. 13). On the other hand, if the value of the second special symbol working memory number counter is still less than the maximum value (Yes), the main control CPU72 proceeds to the next step S41 and subsequent steps.

Step S41: The main control CPU72 increments the second special symbol working memory number by one (increments the value of the second special symbol working memory number counter). Similarly to the previous step S31 (FIG. 14), the lighting state of the second special symbol working memory lamp 35a is controlled by the display output management process (step S232 in FIG. 12) based on the value of the counter added here. Will be.

Step S42: Then, the main control CPU72 obtains the jackpot determination random number value corresponding to the second special symbol from the random number circuit 75 (second lottery element acquisition means, lottery element acquisition means). The method of acquiring the random number value is the same as step S32 (FIG. 14) described above.

Step S43: Next, the main control CPU72 acquires a big hit symbol random number value corresponding to the second special symbol from the big hit symbol random number counter area of the RAM76. The method of acquiring the random number value is the same as step S33 (FIG. 14) described above.

Step S44: Further, the main control CPU72 sequentially obtains the reach determination random number and the variation pattern determination random number relating to the variation condition of the second special symbol from the variation random number counter area of the RAM76 (variation pattern determination element acquisition means, element acquisition). means). The acquisition of these random number values is also performed in the same manner as step S34 (FIG. 14) described above.

Step S45: The main control CPU72 transfers the big hit determination random number, the big hit symbol random number, the reach judgment random number, and the variation pattern random number that are saved to the random number storage area corresponding to the second special symbol, and these random numbers are empty sections in the area. To be stored as a set (storage means). The storage method is the same as step S35 (FIG. 14) described above.

Step S45a: Next, the main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the current game management status (game state) is a big hit. Then, if it is not during the big hit (No), the main control CPU72 executes the following steps S46 and S47. On the other hand, if it is a big hit (Yes), the main control CPU72 skips steps S46 and S47 and proceeds to step S48. The reason for making this determination in the present embodiment is that the effect due to the look-ahead is not performed for the ball entered during the big hit as well.

Step S46: If it is not during the big hit (step S45a: No), then the main control CPU72 executes the acquisition time effect determination process for the second special symbol. This process determines the result of the internal lottery in advance (before the start of fluctuation) based on the jackpot determination random number and the jackpot symbol random number of the second special symbol respectively acquired in the previous steps S42 to S44, and thereby the effect contents It is for judging. The details of the specific processing will be described later.

Step S47: When returning from the production effect determination processing at the time of acquisition, the main control CPU72 next sets the upper byte portion (for example, "B9H") of the special figure destination determination effect command. This upper byte data describes that the command type is “for special figure destination determination effect regarding the second special symbol”. Similarly, the lower byte portion of the special figure destination determination effect command is set in the previous acquisition effect determination process (step S46), so here, by combining the lower byte with the upper byte, for example, 1 word A long command will be generated.

Step S48: Next, the main control CPU72 sets the production command when the working memory number is increased for the second special symbol. Here, a one-word-long production command in which the increased number of working memories (for example, "01H" to "04H") is added to the lower byte with respect to the preceding value (for example, "BCH") of the upper byte that indicates the type of command. To generate. Similarly for the second special symbol, by setting the second place of the lower byte to "0" by default, it can be shown that the value is "the result (change information) due to an increase in the number of working memories". it can. The preceding value “BCH” is a value indicating that the effect command this time is the operation memory number command for the second special symbol.

Step S49: Then, the main control CPU72 executes the effect command output setting process for the second special symbol. Thereby, the special figure destination determination effect command, the operation memory number increase effect command, the starting mouth winning sound control command, and the like for the second special symbol are prepared to be transmitted to the effect control device 124.
Then, when the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU72 returns to the switch input event processing (FIG. 13).

[Production determination process during acquisition]
FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the acquisition effect determination process. The main control CPU72 executes this acquisition time effect determination process in the first special symbol memory update process and the second special symbol memory update process (step S37 in FIG. 14, step S46 in FIG. 15) (preliminary determination). means). As described above, this process is executed for each of the first special symbol (when entering the medium starting winning opening 26) and the second special symbol (when entering the variable starting winning device 28). Therefore, the following description may correspond to a process relating to the first special symbol or a process relating to the second special symbol. The contents of the process will be described below according to each procedure.

Step S50: The main control CPU72 sets the lower byte portion (for example, "00H") of the special figure destination determination effect command (destination determination information). The byte data set here represents the standard value of the command (when it is out of sync).

Step S52: Next, the main control CPU72 loads the big hit determination random number as a random number value for the first determination. The random number to be loaded here is stored in the RAM 76 in the first special symbol memory update process (step S35 in FIG. 14) or the second special symbol memory update process (step S45 in FIG. 15). ..

Step S54: Then, the main control CPU72 determines whether the loaded random number is out of the range of the hit value (here, the lower limit value or less) (lottery result destination determination means, advance determination means). Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets a comparison value (lower limit value) in the A register and subtracts the loaded random number value from this comparison value. The comparison value (lower limit value) is defined in advance according to the winning probability of the internal lottery in the pachinko machine 1. Next, the main control CPU72 determines whether the operation result is 0 or a positive value, for example, from the value of the flag register. As a result, if the loaded random number is out of the range of the hit value (Yes), the main control CPU72 proceeds to step S80.

Step S80: Next, the main control CPU72 executes a deviation pattern variation pre-determination process (variation pattern destination determination means). In this processing, the main control CPU72 generates a variation pattern destination determination command for the variation time at the time of deviation. The variation pattern destination determination command generated here reflects in advance the determination information regarding the variation time (or variation pattern number) particularly when the "time reduction function" is activated. For example, if the current state is the operation of the "time shortening function", the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the "out-of-bound reach variation (non-shortening variation time)" based on the loaded reach determination random number. Determine if there is. As a result, when the variation time corresponds to “outlier reach variation (non-shortening variation time)”, the main control CPU72 generates a variation pattern destination determination command corresponding to “time saving medium non-shortening variation time”. In the case of reach variation, the “reach group (reach type)” may be further determined from the reach mode random number, and the variation pattern destination determination command may be generated from the result. On the other hand, when the variation time does not correspond to the “outlier reach variation (non-shortening variation time)”, the main control CPU 72 generates a variation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the “time saving medium short variation time”. Alternatively, if the current state is the non-operation (low probability state) of the "time reduction function", the main control CPU 72 responds to "normally out-of-range reach variation" based on the loaded reach determination random number. Or not. As a result, when the variation time corresponds to "normal deviation reach variation", the main control CPU72 generates a variation pattern destination determination command corresponding to "normal deviation reach variation time". On the other hand, when the variation time does not correspond to the "normal deviation reach variation", the main control CPU72 generates a variation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the "normal deviation variation time". The variation pattern destination determination command generated here is set in the transmission buffer in the effect command output setting process (steps S39 and S49). In this process, the main control CPU72 may generate a variation pattern destination determination command for the variation pattern at the time of a small hit, similar to the process at the time of the above-mentioned deviation.

When the above procedure is executed, the main control CPU72 ends the acquisition effect determination process, and returns to the calling first special symbol memory update process (FIG. 14) or the second special symbol memory update process (FIG. 15). On the other hand, if the loaded random number is within the range of the hit value in the determination of the previous step S54 (step S54: No), the main control CPU72 proceeds to step S56.

Step S56: The main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the probability state schedule flag according to the previous determination result is set. The probability state schedule flag based on the previous determination result is set when the fluctuation has not yet started but the winning value is among the big hit determination random numbers stored so far. Specifically, if there is a winning value in the big hit determination random number stored so far, the big hit design random number to be paired with this is a "probability variable area passable design (any probability variation pattern other than 12 round normal design )”, the probability state schedule flag is set to, for example, “A0H”. This value represents a flag value for setting the high probability state as a schedule in advance determination (prefetch determination) of the big hit determination random number acquired after this big hit determination random number. On the other hand, if there is a winning value in the big hit determination random number stored so far, if the big hit design random number paired with this corresponds to "uncertain variation (normal) design", probability state For example, "01H" is set in the schedule flag. This value represents a flag value for setting the normal (low) probability state as a schedule when pre-determining (pre-reading determination) the jackpot determining random number acquired after the jackpot determining random number. If there is no winning value among the big hit determination random numbers stored so far, the flag value is reset (00H). The value of the probability state schedule flag is stored in the flag area of the RAM 76, for example. Note that, here, an example is given in which the "probability state schedule flag" is used to strictly perform prior hit determination, but in the case where the prior hit determination is simply performed based on the current probability state, this step S56 and subsequent steps are performed. Steps S58, S60, S62, S76, etc. may be omitted.

If the probability state schedule flag is not set yet (step S56: No), the main control CPU72 then executes step S66.

Step S66: In this case, the main control CPU72 next sets the low probability (normal time) comparison value in the A register. The low-probability time comparison value is also defined in advance in accordance with the low-probability winning probability in the pachinko machine 1.

Step S68: Next, the main control CPU72 loads the "current probability state flag". The probability state flag indicates whether or not the current internal state has a high probability (during probability change), and is stored in the flag area of the RAM 76. If the current probability state is high probability (during probability change), the value “01H” is set as the state flag, and if the current probability state is low probability (normal), the value of the state flag is reset (“00H”). )).

Step S70: Then, the main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the loaded special symbol probability state flag does not represent a high probability (≠01H), and as a result, if it represents a high probability (No. ), and then step S64 is executed.

Step S64: The main control CPU72 sets the high probability time comparison value. As a result, the low-probability time comparison value set in the previous step S66 is rewritten. The high-probability time comparison value is defined in advance according to the high-probability winning probability in the pachinko machine 1.

In this way, when the probability state schedule flag based on the previous determination result is not set yet and the current internal state is high probability, the comparison value is rewritten for high probability time and the next step S72. Will be executed. On the other hand, if it is confirmed in the previous step S70 that the current probability state flag does not indicate a high probability (Yes), the main control CPU72 skips step S64 and executes the next step S72.

Step S72: The main control CPU72 determines whether or not the random number loaded in the previous step S52 is outside the range of the winning value (lottery result destination determining means). That is, the main control CPU 72 subtracts the jackpot determination random number value from the comparison value set for each state. Then, the main control CPU 72 similarly determines from the value of the flag register whether or not the operation result is a negative value (<0), and as a result, if the loaded random number is outside the hit value range (Yes). ), the main control CPU72 executes the off-time variation pattern information pre-determination processing (step S80). On the other hand, if the loaded random number is not outside the range of the hit value but within the range (No), the main control CPU72 proceeds to step S74.

Step S74: The main control CPU72 executes a big hit symbol type determination process. This process is to determine the big hit type (winning type) at that time based on the big hit symbol random number paired with the big hit determination random number. For example, the main control CPU72 loads the big hit symbol random number for each symbol stored in the first special symbol memory update process (step S35 in FIG. 14) or the second special symbol memory update process (step S45 in FIG. 15). Then, the calculation using the comparison value is executed in the same manner as in step S54, and whether the result corresponds to the "probability variation area difficult design (12 round normal design)" or the "probability variation area passable design" as the big hit type To determine. The main control CPU72 stores the determination result at this time as a special symbol destination determination value, and proceeds to the next step S76.

Step S76: Then, the main control CPU72 sets the value of the probability state schedule flag based on the previous determination result. Specifically, when the special symbol destination determination value stored in the previous step S74 represents the "probability variation area passing difficulty symbol", the main control CPU72 sets the value "01H" to the probability state schedule flag. On the other hand, if the special symbol destination determination value represents a "probability variation area passable symbol", the main control CPU72 sets the value "A0H" to the probability state schedule flag. As a result, it is determined that the flag has been set in step S56 in the subsequent processing.

Step S78: The main control CPU72 sets the special symbol destination determination value stored in the previous step S74 as the lower byte of the special symbol destination determination effect command. The special symbol destination determination value is set to, for example, "01H" when it corresponds to the "probability variation region passing difficult symbol", and is set to "A0H" when it corresponds to the "probability variation region passable symbol". In any case, by setting the lower byte data here, the standard lower byte data "00H" set in the previous step S50 is rewritten.

Step S79: Next, the main control CPU72 executes a large hitting variation pattern information pre-determination process (variation pattern destination determination means). In this process, the main control CPU72 generates the above-described variation pattern destination determination command for variation time at the time of a big hit. The variation pattern destination determination command generated here reflects, for example, advance determination information regarding the reach variation time (or variation pattern number) at the time of a big hit. The variation pattern destination determination command generated here is set in the transmission buffer in the effect command output setting process (steps S39 and S49).

The above is the procedure before the probability state schedule flag is set according to the previous determination result (before the internal initial hit). On the other hand, when the probability state schedule flag is set through the previous step S76, the following procedure is executed. However, in the case of performing the hit determination in advance only with the current probability state, it is not necessary to execute the following step S56, step S58, step S60, step S62, and step S76.

Step S56: The main control CPU72, after confirming that the value is already set in the probability state schedule flag (Yes), then executes step S58.

Step S58: The main control CPU72 first sets the low probability (normal time) comparison value in the A register.

Step S60: Next, the main control CPU72 loads the "probability state schedule flag". The stochastic state schedule flag is used to set a stochastic state in a preliminary determination based on the immediately preceding determination result, and is stored in the flag area of the RAM 76. If the probability state based on the immediately preceding prior determination result is scheduled to shift to a high probability (probability change), "A0H" is set as the value of the probability state schedule flag, and conversely the probability state based on the immediately preceding prior determination result. Is scheduled to return to a low probability (normal), "01H" is set as the value of the probability state schedule flag.

Step S62: Then, the main control CPU72 confirms whether the loaded probability state schedule flag does not represent a high probability schedule (≠01H), and as a result, if it indicates a high probability schedule ( No), and then step S64 is executed to set a high probability time comparison value.

In this way, if the probability state schedule flag based on the previous determination result is already set and the value is intended to have a high probability, the comparison value is rewritten for the high probability time, and the next step S72 and subsequent steps are performed. Will be executed. On the other hand, if it is confirmed in the previous step S62 that the probability state schedule flag does not represent a high probability schedule but a normal (low) probability schedule (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes the step. S64 is skipped and the subsequent steps from S72 are executed. As a result, in the present embodiment, the jackpot determination in advance can be performed in consideration of subsequent changes in the internal state based on the previous determination result (normal probability state→high probability state, high probability state→normal probability state). ..

After finishing the above procedure, the main control CPU72 returns to the first special symbol memory update process (FIG. 14) or the second special symbol memory update process (FIG. 15).

[Special symbol game processing]
Next, details of the special symbol game process executed in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12) will be described. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of special symbol game processing. Special symbol game process, execution selection process (step S1000), special symbol variation pre-process (step S2000), special symbol variation process (step S3000), special symbol stop display process (step S4000), big winning time variable winning device This is a configuration including a subroutine (program module) group of the management process (step S5000) and the variable winning device management process at the time of small hit (step S6000). Here, first, the basic flow of the special symbol game process will be described along with each process.

Step S1000: In the execution selection process, the main control CPU72 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (one of steps S2000 to S5000) from the "jump table". For example, the main control CPU72 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and also sets the end of the special symbol game process as the return address in the stack pointer.

Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress status of the process performed so far (special symbol game management status). For example, if the special symbol has not yet started the variable display (special symbol game management status: 00H), the main control CPU72 selects the special symbol variation preprocessing (step S2000) as the next jump destination. On the other hand, if the special symbol variation preprocessing has already been completed (special symbol game management status: 01H), the main control CPU72 selects the special symbol variation process (step S3000) as the next jump destination, and the special symbol variation is in progress. If the process is completed (special symbol game management status: 02H), the special symbol stop displaying process (step S4000) is selected as the next jump destination. In this embodiment, the jump destination address is specified in the “jump table” to select the process. However, in addition to such a selection method, a “process flag”, a “process selection flag”, or the like is used. There is also a known programming example in which the CPU selects the process to be executed next. In such a programming example, the CPU CALLs each process once and performs a conditional branch (continuation/return) by referring to the flags one by one in the first step, but in the selection method of this embodiment, the main control is performed. There is no need for the CPU 72 to call each process one by one.

Step S2000: In the special symbol variation pre-processing, the main control CPU72 performs a work to prepare the condition for starting the variable display of the special symbol. The details of the specific processing will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

Step S3000: In the special symbol variation process, the main control CPU72 controls the drive of the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 while counting the variation timer. Specifically, an ON or OFF drive signal (1 byte data) is output to each segment and dot (0th to 7th) of the 7-segment LED. The pattern of the drive signal changes with the passage of time, whereby the variable display of the special symbol is performed.

Step S4000: In the special symbol stop display processing, the main control CPU72 performs drive control of the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35. Here, similarly, an ON or OFF drive signal is output for each segment and dot of the 7-segment LED, but the pattern of the drive signal is constant, and thus the stop display of the special symbol is performed.

Step S5000: The big winning time variable winning device management process is selected when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the manner of the big hit in the special symbol stop displaying process. When the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of a big hit, there is an opportunity to shift from the normal state until then to the big hit game state (a special game state advantageous to the player). During the big hit game, the jump destination is set to the big hit time variable winning device management process in the previous execution selection process (step S1000), and the variable display of the special symbol is not performed. In the jackpot variable winning device management processing, the first big winning opening solenoid 90 or the second big winning opening solenoid 97 until a predetermined time (for example, 29 seconds or 0.1 seconds or counting the entering of 10 game balls) ), the first variable winning a prize device 30 and the second variable winning a prize device 31 are opened and closed in a predetermined pattern by being excited for a preset number of continuous operations (for example, 16 times). In the meantime, by intensively winning the game balls to the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31, the player is given an opportunity to collectively collect a lot of prize balls (special game. Execution means). In addition, the opening and closing operations of the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 at the time of a big hit are referred to as "round", and if the number of continuous operations is 16 in total, these are referred to as "16 rounds". May be collectively referred to.

In the present embodiment, the first variable winning device 30 is opened and closed in the first to fifth rounds and the seventh to sixteenth rounds, and the second variable winning device 31 is opened and closed in the sixth round. ing.

Further, when the main control CPU72 sets a special winning opening opening pattern (the number of rounds, the number of opening/closing operations per round, the opening time, etc.) in the jackpot variable winning device management processing, the first variable winning device 30 for one round. Alternatively, each time the opening/closing operation of the second variable winning device 31 is completed, the value of the round number counter is incremented by 1. The value of the round counter is stored in the count area of the RAM 76 with the initial value set to 0, for example. Further, the main control CPU72 generates a round number command representing the value of the round number counter. The round number command is transmitted to the production control device 124 in the production command transmission process (step S142 in FIG. 9). When the value of the round number counter reaches the set number of continuous operations, the main control CPU 72 ends the big hit game (big win) for that round.

When the big hit game is finished, the main control CPU 72 changes the state after the big hit game (high probability state, time shortened state) based on the game state flag (probability variation function operation flag, time reduction function operation flag) ( High-probability time reduction state transition means, advantageous game state transition means, special state transition means). In the "high probability state", the probability varying function is activated, and the winning probability in the internal lottery becomes about 10 times higher than usual (specific game state transition means, high probability state transition means, high probability state setting means). Further, in the "time shortening state", the time shortening function operates, the operation lottery of the ordinary symbol has a high probability, the variation time of the ordinary symbol is shortened, and the opening time of the variable start winning device 28 is extended. The number of times of opening increases (so-called electric Chu support is performed). The “high-probability state” and the “time-reduced state” may be shifted to either one of them in terms of control, or may be shifted to both of them.

Step S6000: The small-hit-time variable winning device management process is selected when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of the small hit in the special symbol stop display process. For example, when a special symbol is stopped and displayed in a small hit mode, an opportunity to shift from the normal state until then to the small hit game state occurs. During the small hit game, the jump destination is set to the small hitting variable winning device management process in the previous execution selection process (step S1000), and the variable display of the special symbol is not performed. In the small hit game, the first variable winning device 30 opens and closes a predetermined number of times (for example, twice) in a predetermined opening time (for example, 0.1 seconds), but almost all winnings to the first big winning opening occur. do not do.

[Multiple winning types]
In the present embodiment, the following winning types are provided as a plurality of winning types.
(1) "6 round certainty variation jackpot 1"
(2) "6 round certainty variation jackpot 2"
(3) "12 round probability variation jackpot 1 (effectively 4 rounds)"
(4) "Twelve rounds, odd-range jackpots 2 (effectively 9 rounds)"
(5) "12 round regular jackpot (effectively 9 rounds)"
(6) “16 round certainty jackpot”
In addition, in this embodiment, a big hit other than 6 rounds, 12 rounds, and 16 rounds may be provided.

The winning type corresponds to the type of the first special symbol or the second special symbol stopped and displayed at the time of winning. For example, "6 round certainty variation big hit 1" corresponds to the big hit of "6 round certainty variation big hit 1", "6 round certainty variation big hit 2" corresponds to big hit of "6 round certainty variation big design 2". In addition, "12 round certainty variation big hit 1" corresponds to the big hit of "12 round certainty variation big hit 1", "12 round certainty variation big hit 2" corresponds to big hit of "12 round certainty variation big design 2". Furthermore, "12 round normal big hit" corresponds to the big hit of "12 round normal design", and "16 round certainty variation big hit" corresponds to the big hit of "16 round certainty variation design". Therefore, in the following, the “winning type” will be appropriately referred to as a “winning symbol”.

[Opening pattern of variable winning device]
FIG. 18 is a diagram showing an opening operation pattern of the variable winning device. The contents of opening the special winning opening and the probability variation area corresponding to each winning symbol will be described.

[6 round probability variation pattern 1]
In the special symbol stop displaying process, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of "6 round probability variation symbol 1", a trigger occurs to shift from the normal state until then to the big hit game state (special game execution means). In this case, in the first round to the fifth round, the first big winning opening of the first variable winning device 30 is long opened (for example, 29.0 seconds opened). In the sixth round, the second special winning opening of the second variable winning device 31 is long opened (for example, 29.0 seconds opened). Therefore, in the big hit game of "6 round probability variation pattern 1", the payout (prize ball) for 6 rounds is substantially given to the player.

Here, in the sixth round in the case where the "6 round probability variation pattern 1" is applied, the game ball may pass through the probability variation area because the second special winning opening is opened long. Therefore, in the case of "6 round probability variation pattern 1", if the gaming ball passes through the probability variation area arranged inside the second variable winning device 31 in the sixth round, after the jackpot game is over. The "probability variation function" is activated, and the player is provided with a privilege of shifting to the "high probability state".

Furthermore, if "6 round probability variation pattern 1" is applicable, regardless of whether or not the probability variation area has passed, even if the "time reduction function" is inactive in the game up to that point, the jackpot game ends. By activating the “time reduction function” later, the player is provided with a privilege of shifting to the “time reduction state”.

[6 round probability variation pattern 2]
In the special symbol stop displaying process, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of "6 round probability variation symbol 2", a trigger occurs to shift from the normal state until then to the big hit game state (special game execution means). In this case, in the first round to the fifth round, the first big winning opening of the first variable winning device 30 is long opened (for example, 29.0 seconds opened). In the sixth round, the second special winning opening of the second variable winning device 31 is long opened (for example, 29.0 seconds opened). For this reason, the big hit game of "6 round probability variation pattern 2" substantially gives a payout (prize ball) for 6 rounds to the player.

Here, in the sixth round in the case where the "6 round probability variation pattern 2" is applied, the game ball may pass through the probability variation area because the second special winning opening is opened long. Therefore, in the case of "6 round probability variation pattern 2", if the game ball passes through the probability variation area arranged inside the second variable winning device 31 in the sixth round, after the jackpot game is over. The "probability variation function" is activated, and the player is provided with a privilege of shifting to the "high probability state".

Furthermore, if "6 round probability variation pattern 2" is applicable, regardless of whether the probability variation area has passed or not, even if the "time reduction function" is inactive in the game up to that point, the jackpot game ends. By activating the “time reduction function” later, the player is provided with a privilege of shifting to the “time reduction state”. Note that the difference between the “6 round probability variation pattern 1” and the “6 round probability variation pattern 2” is the difference in the number of time reductions given (details will be described later).

[12 round probability variation pattern 1]
In the special symbol stop display process, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of "12 round probability variation symbol 1", the opportunity to shift from the normal state until then to the big hit game state occurs (special game execution means). In this case, in the first round and the second round, the first big winning opening of the first variable winning device 30 is short-opened (for example, opened for 0.1 seconds). Therefore, in the first round and the second round when the “12th round probability variation pattern 1” is applied, the game is finished without giving a substantial payout (prize ball) to the player. In addition, in the third round to the fifth round, the first big winning opening of the first variable winning device 30 is opened long (for example, 29.0 seconds opened). In the sixth round, the second special winning opening of the second variable winning device 31 is long opened (for example, 29.0 seconds opened). Further, in the seventh round to the twelfth round, the first big winning opening of the first variable winning device 30 is short-circuited (for example, 0.1 second is opened). Therefore, in the seventh round to the twelfth round when the “12th round probability variation pattern 1” is applied, the game is finished without giving a substantial payout (prize ball) to the player. Therefore, in the big hit game of "12 round probability variation pattern 1", the payout (prize ball) for 4 rounds is substantially given to the player.

Here, in the 6th round in the case where the "12th round probability variation pattern 1" is applied, the game ball may pass through the probability variation area because the second special winning opening is opened long. Therefore, in the case of "12 round probability variation pattern 1", if the game ball passes through the probability variation area arranged inside the second variable winning device 31 in the sixth round, after the jackpot game is over. The "probability variation function" is activated, and the player is provided with a privilege of shifting to the "high probability state".

Further, if the "12 round probability variation pattern 1" is applicable, regardless of whether the probability variation area has passed or not, even if the "time reduction function" is inactive in the game up to that point, the jackpot game ends. By activating the “time reduction function” later, the player is provided with a privilege of shifting to the “time reduction state”.

[12 round probability variation pattern 2]
In the special symbol stop display process, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of "12 round probability variation symbol 2", the opportunity to shift from the normal state until then to the big hit game state occurs (special game execution means). In this case, in the first round to the fifth round, the first big winning opening of the first variable winning device 30 is long opened (for example, 29.0 seconds opened). In the sixth round, the second special winning opening of the second variable winning device 31 is long opened (for example, 29.0 seconds opened). Further, in the seventh round to the ninth round, the first big winning opening of the first variable winning device 30 is opened long (for example, 29.0 seconds opened). Further, in the tenth round to the twelfth round, the first big winning opening of the first variable winning a prize device 30 is short-opened (for example, 0.1 second opened). Therefore, in the case of the “12th round probability variation pattern 2”, in the 10th to 12th rounds, the process ends without giving a substantial payout (prize ball) to the player. Therefore, in the big hit game of "12 round probability variation pattern 2", the payout (prize ball) for 9 rounds is substantially given to the player.

Here, in the sixth round in the case where the “12th round probability variation pattern 2” is applied, the second winning hole is opened long, so that the game ball may pass through the probability variation area. Therefore, in the case of "12 round probability variation pattern 2", if the game ball passes through the probability variation area arranged inside the second variable winning device 31 in the sixth round, after the jackpot game is over. The "probability variation function" is activated, and the player is provided with a privilege of shifting to the "high probability state".

Further, if the "12 round probability variation pattern 2" is applicable, regardless of whether the probability variation area has passed or not, even if the "time reduction function" is inactive in the previous game, the jackpot game ends. By activating the “time reduction function” later, the player is provided with a privilege of shifting to the “time reduction state”.

[12 round normal pattern]
In the special symbol stop displaying process, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of "12 round normal symbol", the opportunity to shift from the normal state until then to the big hit game state occurs (special game executing means). In this case, in the first round to the fifth round, the first big winning opening of the first variable winning device 30 is long opened (for example, 29.0 seconds opened). In the sixth round, the second special winning opening of the second variable winning device 31 is short-circuited (for example, 0.1 second is opened). Further, in the seventh round to the tenth round, the first special winning opening of the first variable winning device 30 is opened long (for example, 29.0 seconds opened). Further, in the tenth round and the eleventh round, the first big winning opening of the first variable winning device 30 is short-opened (for example, opened for 0.1 seconds). Therefore, in the tenth round and the eleventh round when the "12th round normal symbol" is applied, the game is finished without giving a substantial payout (prize ball) to the player. Therefore, the big hit game of "12 round normal design" substantially gives the player 9 payouts (prize balls) for 9 rounds.

Here, in the sixth round when it corresponds to the “12 round normal symbol”, it is difficult (impossible) for the game ball to pass through the probability variation area because the second special winning opening is short-circuited. Therefore, after the jackpot game is over, the "probability variation function" is not activated, and the privilege of shifting to the "high probability state" is not given to the player.

In addition, in the case of "12 round normal design", even if the "time saving function" is inactive in the previous game, by operating the "time saving function" after the jackpot game is over. , A privilege of shifting to the “time reduction state” is given to the player.

[16 round probability variation pattern]
In the special symbol stop display process, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of "16 round probability variation symbol", a trigger occurs to shift from the normal state until then to the big hit game state (special game execution means). In this case, in the first round to the fifth round, the first big winning opening of the first variable winning device 30 is long opened (for example, 29.0 seconds opened). In the sixth round, the second special winning opening of the second variable winning device 31 is long opened (for example, 29.0 seconds opened). Further, in the seventh round to the sixteenth round, the first big winning opening of the first variable winning device 30 is opened long (for example, 29.0 seconds opened). For this reason, the big hit game of "16 round probability variation pattern" substantially gives the player 16 balls worth (prize balls) of the round.

Here, in the sixth round when it corresponds to the “16 round probability variation pattern”, the game ball may pass through the probability variation area because the second special winning opening is opened long. For this reason, in the case of "16 round probability variation pattern", if the game ball passes through the probability variation area arranged inside the second variable winning device 31 in the sixth round, after the jackpot game, " The probability variation function is activated to give the player the privilege of shifting to the “high probability state”.

Furthermore, if the "16 round probability variation pattern" is applied, regardless of whether or not the probability variation area has passed, even if the "time reduction function" is inactive in the game until then, after the jackpot game is over. By operating the "time reduction function", the privilege of shifting to the "time reduction state" is given to the player.

Here, the first big winning opening of the first variable winning device 30 is closed without waiting for the elapse of the longest opening time when a predetermined number of winnings (for example, 10 times = 10 game balls) occur in one round. To be done. In addition, similarly to the second big winning opening of the second variable winning device 31, when a predetermined number of winnings (for example, 10 times = 10 game balls) occur in one round, without waiting for the elapse of the longest opening time. Will be closed.

In any case, if the winning symbol corresponds to "any of the probability variation symbols other than the 12 round normal symbol", and if the game ball passes through the probability variation area during the big hit game, the internal state after the big hit game is "high probability. The privilege of shifting to the "time saving state" is given to the player. On the other hand, if the winning symbol corresponds to the "12 round normal symbol", it is difficult for the game ball to pass the probability variation area during the big hit game, so the internal state shifts to the "low probability time reduction state" after the big hit game ends. To do. In addition, even if the winning symbol corresponds to any one of the probability variation symbols other than the 12-round normal symbol, if the game ball does not pass through the probability variation region during the big hit game, the internal state is “low probability time after the big hit game ends. Move to "shortened state".

Further, in the operation pattern shown in this table, the inter-round interval time is the common “1.5 seconds”. The inter-round interval time is a waiting time set between rounds.

[Small hits]
Further, in the present embodiment, a small hit is provided as a winning type other than non-winning. When the small hit is won, the small hit game is performed separately from the big hit game, and the first variable winning device 30 is opened/closed (special game execution means). That is, in the special symbol stop display process, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of a small hit, the small hit game (the first variable winning device 30 operates in the low probability state or the high probability state) Game) is executed. In such a small hit game, the first variable winning device 30 opens and closes a predetermined number of times (for example, twice), but almost no winning of the first big winning opening occurs. Also, even if the small hit game is over, the "probability change function" will not operate, and the "time reduction function" will not operate, so it will be "high probability state" or "time reduction state". No benefits will be granted for transfer (this is not a prerequisite). In addition, even if you win the small hit in the "high probability state", the "high probability state" will not end after the small hit game ends, and even if you win the small hit in the "time reduction state", The "time reduction state" does not end after the winning game ends (except when the maximum number of times is reached). In addition, in the present embodiment, the game specification is to set a small hit, but it may be a game specification not to set a small hit.

[Special symbol fluctuation pretreatment]
FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of special symbol variation preprocessing. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described.

Step S2100: First, the main control CPU72 confirms whether the first special symbol working memory number or the second special symbol working memory number is remaining (greater than 0). This confirmation can be performed by referring to the value of the working memory number counter stored in the RAM 76. When the number of operating memories of both the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 0 (No), the main control CPU72 executes the demo setting process of step S2500.

Step S2500: In this process, the main control CPU72 generates a demonstration effect command. The demonstration effect command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect command transmission process (step S142 in FIG. 9). When the demo setting process is executed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process. At the time of return, the return is made to the end address as described above (the same applies hereafter).

On the other hand, if the value of the working memory number counter of either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is larger than 0 (Yes), the main control CPU72 next executes step S2200.

Step S2200: The main control CPU72 executes a special symbol storage area shift process. In this process, the main control CPU72 preferentially reads out one of the lottery random numbers (big hit determination random number, big hit symbol random number) stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76, which corresponds to the second special symbol. At this time, if the random numbers are stored in two or more sections, the main control CPU 72 sequentially reads the random numbers from the first section and erases (consumes) them, and then moves (shifts) the remaining random numbers one by one to the previous section. ) Let me. The read random number is stored in another temporary storage area, for example. When the random number corresponding to the second special symbol is not stored, the main control CPU72 reads the random number corresponding to the first special symbol and stores it in the temporary storage area. Each random number stored in the temporary storage area is used for internal lottery in the next big hit determination process. As a result, in the present embodiment, the variable display of the second special symbol is given priority over the first special symbol. Note that the program may be one in which random numbers are simply read in the order in which they are stored, without providing such a priority for each special symbol. Further, in this process, the main control CPU72 subtracts one by one from the value of the working memory number counter (the first special symbol or the second special symbol, which is the shift of the random number) stored in the RAM76, and subtracts The latter value is set to the "number of working memories at the start of fluctuation". Thereby, in the display output management process (step S232 in FIG. 12), the display mode of the number stored by the first special symbol working memory lamp 34a or the second special symbol working memory lamp 35a changes (decrease by 1). When the procedure up to this point is completed, the main control CPU72 next executes step S2300.

Step S2300: The main control CPU72 executes a big hit determination process (internal lottery). In this process, the main control CPU72 first sets the range of the big hit value, and determines whether or not the read random number value is included in this range (symbol lottery execution means). The range of the jackpot value set at this time differs between the low-probability state and the high-probability state (when the probability varying function is activated), and the range of the jackpot value is expanded about 10 times in the high-probability state than in the low-probability state. It Further, the range of the big hit value varies depending on the current set value, and the range of the big hit value is set wider in the high setting than in the low setting. In this way, the special symbol lottery (predetermined lottery) is executed with the winning probability corresponding to the current set value. If the random number value read at this time is within the range of the big hit value, the main control CPU72 sets the big hit flag (01H), and then proceeds to step S2400.

When the big hit flag is not set, the main control CPU 72 sets the range of the small hit value next in the same big hit determination process, and judges whether or not the read random number value is included in this range (symbol lottery execution means). ). The "small hit" here is something other than the non-win (miss), but has a different property from the "big hit". That is, the “big hit” causes an opportunity (a game turning point) to shift to the “high probability state” or the “time reduction state”, but the “small hit” does not cause such an opportunity. However, the "small hit" is positioned as a condition that satisfies the condition for operating the first variable winning device 30, like the "big hit". The range of the small hit value set at this time may be different or the same in the normal probability state and the high probability state (when the probability varying function is activated). In any case, if the read random number value is within the range of the small hit value, the main control CPU72 sets the small hit flag, and then proceeds to step S2400. As described above, in the present embodiment, the range of the big hit value and the small hit value is preliminarily defined on the program as the hit range corresponding to other than the non-win, but the big hit judgment table and the small hit judgment table for each state are previously set. It is also possible to write each in the ROM 74, read this, and compare with the random number value to make a big hit determination.

Step S2400: The main control CPU72 determines whether or not the value (01H) is set to the big hit flag in the big hit determination process. If the value (01H) is not set in the jackpot flag (No), the main control CPU72 next executes step S2402.

Step S2402: The main control CPU72 determines whether or not the value (01H) is set to the small hit flag in the previous big hit determination process. If the value (01H) is not set in the small hit flag (No), the main control CPU72 next executes step S2404. The main control CPU 72 may determine whether the big hit (for example, 01H is set) or the small hit (for example, 0AH is set) according to the value of the common hit flag without separately preparing the big hit flag and the small hit flag.

Step S2404: The main control CPU72 executes a stop symbol determination process at the time of disengagement. In this process, the main control CPU72 sets the stop symbol number data at the time of the disengagement by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35. Further, the main control CPU72 generates a stop symbol command and a lottery result command (when out of sync) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. These commands are transmitted to the production control device 124 in the production command transmission process (step S142 in FIG. 9).

In the present embodiment, since the 7-segment LED is used for the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35, for example, the display mode of the stop symbol at the time of detachment is always one segment (center It is possible to fix the stop symbol number data to one value (for example, 64H) by keeping only the lighted display of the bar "-"). In this case, the storage capacity used on the program can be reduced, the processing load on the main control CPU 72 can be reduced, and the processing speed can be improved.

Step S2405: Next, the main control CPU72 executes the off-time variation pattern determination processing. In this process, the main control CPU72 determines the variation pattern number when the special symbol is out (variation pattern selection means). The variation pattern number is used to distinguish the type (pattern) of variation display of the special symbol and to correspond to the variation time required for the variation display. Since the variable time at the time of departure differs depending on whether or not it is in the "time reduction state", the main control CPU72 loads the game state flag in this process, and whether the current state is the "time reduction state". Confirm whether or not. In the "time-reduced state", the variation time at the time of deviation is set to a shortened time (for example, about 2.0 seconds) except when the reach variation is basically performed (variation time determination means during shortening). ). Further, even if the reach variation is not performed even if it is not the “time shortening state”, the variation time at the time of deviation is based on, for example, the “variable display start operation memory number (0 to 3)” set in step S2200. It may be shortened (for example, the number of working memory at the start of variable display→about 12.5 seconds, the number of working memory at the start of varying display→about 8 seconds, the number of working memory at the beginning of varying display 2→5 Approximately 2 seconds, the number of working memory at the start of variable display is 3 → 2.5 seconds). In addition, the stop display time of the symbol at the time of deviation is constant (for example, about 0.5 seconds) regardless of the variation pattern. The main control CPU72 sets the value of the determined fluctuation time (at the time of deviation) to the fluctuation timer, and sets the value of the stop display time at the time of deviation to the stop symbol display timer.

In the present embodiment, if the result of the internal lottery corresponds to non-winning, for example, in the production, a control such as "reach production" is generated and is lost, or "reach production" is not generated and is controlled. I am trying. Then, in the "out-of-shift variation pattern selection table", variation patterns corresponding to a plurality of types of effects, for example, "non-reach effect" and "reach effect" are defined in advance. One of the fluctuation patterns will be selected. The reach production includes various reach productions such as normal reach production, long reach production, super reach production, story reach production, and the like.

[Example of variation pattern selection table at the time of detachment]
FIG. 20 is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern selection table at the time of loss.
This selection table is a table (variation pattern defining means) used at the time of failure (when it is not won). Further, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, a "comparison value" and a "variation pattern number" are set and stored in order from the head address, one byte each. The “comparison value” includes, for example, eight stepwise different values “101”, “201”, “211”, “221”, “231”, “241”, “251”, “255 (FFH)”. The "variation pattern number" of "1" to "8" is assigned to each "comparison value".

The fluctuation pattern numbers “1” to “3” correspond to fluctuation patterns that are out of reach without performing the reach effect, and fluctuation pattern numbers “4” to “8” are fluctuation patterns that are out of reach after reach. It corresponds. Of these, the fluctuation pattern numbers “4” to “6” correspond to fluctuation patterns that are lost after normal reach, and the fluctuation pattern numbers “7” correspond to fluctuation patterns that are deviated after super reach. The fluctuation pattern number “8” corresponds to a fluctuation pattern that is lost after story reach. The variation pattern selection table may have different table contents depending on the number of working memories at the start of variation, the internal state (low probability state or high probability state, non-time reduction state or time reduction state), and the winning symbol (hereinafter, As well).

Here, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern have greatly different set lengths of variation time. That is, the "non-reach fluctuation pattern" basically corresponds to a short fluctuation time (for example, about 2.0 seconds to 13.0 seconds depending on the number of working memories), whereas the "reach fluctuation pattern" is It corresponds to a fluctuation time that is more than twice that (for example, about 30 seconds to 150 seconds).

Then, the main control CPU72 sequentially compares the obtained variation pattern determination random number value with the "comparison value" in the variation pattern selection table, and if the random number value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the comparison value is set to the comparison value. The corresponding variation pattern number is selected (variation pattern determining means). For example, if the fluctuation pattern determination random number value at that time is “190”, the main control CPU 72 determines that the random number value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value “101”. 201” and the random number value. In this case, since the random number value is less than or equal to the comparison value, the main control CPU72 selects "2" as the corresponding fluctuation pattern number.

[Refer to FIG. 19: Special symbol fluctuation preprocessing]
Steps S2404 and S2405 described above are the control procedure when the jackpot determination result is out of alignment (other than non-win), but when the determination result is a jackpot (step S2400: Yes) or a jackpot (step S2402: Yes). The main control CPU72 executes the following procedure. First, the case of a big hit will be described.

Step S2410: The main control CPU72 executes a big hit stop symbol determination process (winning type determination means). In this process, the main control CPU72, based on the big hit symbol random number, for each special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol), determines the type of the winning symbol of this time (big hit stop symbol number). The relationship between the jackpot random number value and the type of winning symbol is defined in advance in the special symbol determination data table (winning type determining means). Therefore, the main control CPU72 can refer to the big hit stop symbol selection table in the big hit stop symbol determination process, and determine the type of winning symbol based on the big hit symbol random number from the stored contents.

[Winning pattern at the time of a big hit]
In the present embodiment, as the winning symbols that are selectively determined at the time of a big hit, roughly six types of winning symbols are prepared. The six types of breakdowns are "6 round probability variation pattern 1", "6 round probability variation pattern 2", "12 round probability variation pattern 1", "12 round probability variation pattern 2", "12 round normal pattern", "16 round probability variation pattern" It is. In addition, each winning symbol may further include a plurality of winning symbols. For example, if "6 round probability variation pattern 1", "6 round probability variation pattern 1a", "6 round probability variation pattern 1b", "6 round probability variation pattern 1c", and so on.

Further, in the present embodiment, the selection ratio of the winning symbols selected during the jackpot of the internal lottery corresponding to each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is different. Therefore, the main control CPU72 distinguishes the winning symbol to be selected depending on whether the result of the big hit this time corresponds to the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

[Stop symbol selection table for the first special symbol big hit]
FIG. 21 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table. When the result of the big hit this time corresponds to the first special symbol, the main control CPU 72 determines the kind of the winning symbol by referring to the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table (winning type defining means).

In the 1st special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, the distribution value for each winning symbol is shown in the left column, and each distribution value “40”, “10”, “50” has a denominator of 100. It corresponds to the ratio of cases. In the second column from the left, "12 round probability variation pattern 1 (actual 4 rounds)", "12 round probability variation pattern 2 (actual 9 rounds)", "12 round normal symbol ( 9 rounds)” is shown. That is, at the time of a big hit corresponding to the first special symbol, the ratio of selecting "12 round probability variation symbol 1 (actual 4 rounds)" is 40/100 (=40%), and "12 round probability variation symbol 2 (actually 9 rounds)” is selected by 10/100 (=10%), and “12 rounds normal jackpot (actual 9 rounds)” is selected by 50/100 (=50%). .. The size of each distribution value corresponds to the selection ratio for each winning symbol using a big hit symbol random number.

In any case, when the result of the big hit this time corresponds to the first special symbol, the main control CPU72 performs a selection lottery based on the big hit symbol random number, the selection ratio shown in the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table. The winning symbol is selectively determined with. Further, in the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, as shown in the third column from the left, for example, 2 bytes of command data is defined as the stop symbol command at the time of winning. The stop symbol command is described, for example, in a combination of MODE value-EVENT value, and the MODE value “B1H” of the upper byte among them is that the winning symbol of this time is selected at the time of the big hit of the first special symbol. Represents. Further, the EVENT values “01H”, “02H”, and “03H” of the lower byte represent the corresponding winning symbol types in the selection table. Therefore, for example, the result of the big hit this time corresponds to the first special symbol, when "12 round probability variation symbol 1" is selected as the winning symbol, the stop symbol command at the time of winning is described as "B1H01H". Will be.

As described above, when the main control CPU 72 selects a winning symbol from the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, it generates a stop symbol command at that time. The generated stop symbol command is transmitted to the production control device 124 in the production command transmission process, for example. Further, the main control CPU72 determines a big hit stop symbol number for the first special symbol based on the selected winning symbol.

[Number of probable changes]
In the second column from the right of the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, the value of the probability variation number (ST number) given after the end of the big hit game is shown.
In the present embodiment, when the game ball passes through the probability variation area during the big hit game, which corresponds to “12 round probability variation symbol 1” or “12 round probability variation symbol 2”, the probability variation number is given 170 times.
On the other hand, in the case of "12 round normal symbol", it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the probability variation area during the big hit game, so the probability variation number is not given. In addition, although it corresponds to "12 round probability variation pattern 1" or "12 round probability variation pattern 2", when the game ball does not pass the probability variation area during the big hit game, the probability variation number is not given.

[Time saving]
In the right column of the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, the value of the number of times of saving (limit number) given after the end of the big hit game is shown.
In the present embodiment, if the game ball passes through the probability variation area during the big hit game, which corresponds to “12 round probability variation symbol 1” or “12 round probability variation symbol 2”, the time saving number is given 170 times.
On the other hand, when the “12-round normal symbol” is applied, the time saving number is given 100 times.
In addition, although it corresponds to "12 round probability variation pattern 1" or "12 round probability variation pattern 2", when the game ball does not pass through the probability variation area during the big hit game, the time saving number is given 100 times.

[2nd special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table]
FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table. When the result of the big hit this time corresponds to the second special symbol, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of the winning symbol by referring to the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table (winning type defining means).

Also in the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, the distribution value for each winning symbol is shown in the left column, and each distribution value “60”, “20”, “20” has a denominator of 100. It corresponds to the ratio in the case of. Similarly, in the second column from the left, "16 round certainty variation design", "6 round certainty variation design 1", "6 round certainty variation design 2" corresponding to the distribution value are shown. That is, at the time of a big hit corresponding to the second special symbol, the proportion of the "16 round probability variation symbol" being selected is 60/100 (=60%), and the proportion of the "6 round probability variation symbol 1" being selected. Is 20/100 (=20%), and the ratio at which the “6 round probability variation pattern 2” is selected is 20/100 (=20%).

If the result of this big hit corresponds to the second special symbol, the main control CPU72 performs the selection lottery based on the big hit symbol random number, and selects the winning symbol at the selection ratio shown in the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table. To make a decision. Similarly, in the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, as shown in the third column from the left, for example, 2-byte command data is defined as the stop symbol command at the time of winning. Again, the stop symbol command is described by a combination of MODE value and EVENT value, of which the MODE value “B2H” of the upper byte is that the winning symbol of this time was selected at the time of the big hit of the second special symbol. It means that. Further, the EVENT values “01H”, “02H”, and “03H” of the lower byte represent the corresponding winning symbol types in the selection table. Therefore, for example, the result of the big hit this time corresponds to the second special symbol, and when "16 round probability variation symbol" is selected as the winning symbol, the stop symbol command is described as "B2H01H". ..

As described above, when the main control CPU 72 selects the winning symbol from the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, it generates the stop symbol command at that time. The generated stop symbol command is transmitted to the production control device 124 in the production command transmission process, for example. Further, the main control CPU72 determines a big hit stop symbol number for the second special symbol based on the selected winning symbol.

[Number of probable changes]
The second column from the right of the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, the value of the probability variation number (ST number) given after the end of the big hit game is shown.
In the present embodiment, the "16 round probability variation pattern", "6 round probability variation pattern 1" or "6 round probability variation pattern 2" corresponds to, if the game ball passes the probability variation area during the big hit game, the probability variation number is 170 times. Granted. Although it corresponds to "16 round probability variation pattern", "6 round probability variation pattern 1" or "6 round probability variation pattern 2", if the game ball does not pass the probability variation area during the big hit game, the number of probability variation is not given. ..

[Time saving]
In the right column of the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, the value of the number of times saved (limit number) given after the end of the big hit game is shown.
In this embodiment, if the game ball passes through the probability variation area during the big hit game, which corresponds to “16 round probability variation symbol” or “6 round probability variation symbol 1”, the time saving number is given 170 times.
On the other hand, if the game ball passes through the probability variation area during the big hit game, which corresponds to “6 round probability variation pattern 2”, the number of time reductions is given 100 times.
In addition, although it corresponds to "16 round probability variation pattern", "6 round probability variation pattern 1" or "6 round probability variation pattern 2", if the game ball does not pass the probability variation area during the big hit game, the time saving number is 100 times. Granted.

[Refer to FIG. 19: Special symbol fluctuation preprocessing]
Step S2412: Next, the main control CPU72 executes a big hit time variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main control CPU72 determines the variation pattern (variation time and stop display time) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol based on the variation pattern determination random number shifted in step S2200. In addition, the main control CPU72 sets the value of the determined fluctuation time in the fluctuation timer, and also sets the value of the stop display time in the stop symbol display timer. In general, in the case of a big hit reach fluctuation, a fluctuation time longer than that at the time of losing is determined.

In the present embodiment, when the internal lottery results in a big hit, for example, a "reach effect" is generated in the effect to perform a big hit control. Then, in the "big hit variation pattern selection table", variation patterns corresponding to a plurality of types of "reach effects" are defined. When the big hit is hit, one of the variation patterns is selected. It will be.
Here, the reach effect includes various reach effects such as a normal reach effect, a long reach effect, a super reach effect, and the like. Further, at the time of winning when the time shortening function is activated, even if a variation pattern having a short variation time (a variation pattern which does not reach reach) is selected instead of a variation pattern having a long variation time, Good.

[Example of big hit variation pattern selection table]
FIG. 23 is a diagram showing an example of a big hit variation pattern selection table.
This selection table is a table used at the time of a big hit (variation pattern defining means). Further, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, a "comparison value" and a "variation pattern number" are set and stored in order from the head address, one byte each. The “comparison value” includes, for example, eight stepwise different values “101”, “201”, “211”, “221”, “231”, “241”, “251”, “255 (FFH)”. The "variation pattern number" of "61" to "68" is assigned to each "comparison value".

The variation pattern numbers “61” to “68” all correspond to variation patterns that are hit when the reach effect is performed. Of these, the fluctuation pattern numbers “61” to “64” correspond to the fluctuation patterns that are hit after the story reach, and the fluctuation pattern numbers “65” and “66” are the fluctuation patterns that are hit after the super reach. Correspondingly, the fluctuation pattern numbers “67” and “68” correspond to the fluctuation patterns which are hit after the normal reach. It should be noted that when winning in a high probability time shortened state, a variation pattern for winning may be set without executing the reach effect.

The main control CPU72 sequentially compares the obtained variation pattern determination random number value with the "comparison value" in the above variation pattern selection table, and if the random number value is less than or equal to the comparison value, it corresponds to the comparison value. A variation pattern number is selected (variation pattern determining means). For example, if the fluctuation pattern determination random number value at that time is “190”, the main control CPU 72 determines that the random number value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value “101”. 201” and the random number value. In this case, since the random number value is less than or equal to the comparison value, the main control CPU72 selects "62" as the corresponding fluctuation pattern number.

[Refer to FIG. 19: Special symbol fluctuation preprocessing]
Step S2414: Next, the main control CPU72 executes a big hit other setting process. In this process, the main control CPU72, the type of winning symbol determined in the previous step S2410 (big hit stop symbol number) is any winning symbol, the value of the time shortening function operation flag (01H ) Is set in the flag area of the RAM 76 (time reduction state transition means, time reduction function operation means, advantageous game state transition means, special state transition means).

In the process of step S2414, the main control CPU72 determines the display mode of the stop symbol (big hit symbol) by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 based on the big hit stop symbol number. In addition, the main control CPU72 generates a lottery result command (at the time of big hit) together with a stop symbol command (at the time of big hit). These stop symbol commands and lottery result commands are also transmitted to the production control device 124 in the production command transmission processing.

Next, the processing at the time of a small hit will be described.
Step S2407: The main control CPU72 executes a small hit stop symbol determination process. In this process, the main control CPU72 determines the type of winning symbol at the time of small hit (stop symbol number at small hit) based on the big hit symbol random number. Here, similarly, the relationship between the big hit symbol random number value and the type of the winning symbol at the time of the small hit is defined in advance in the special symbol selection table at the time of the small hit (the winning type defining means). In the present embodiment, in order to reduce the load on the main control CPU 72, the big hit symbol random number is used to determine the winning symbol at the time of the small hit, but a dedicated random number may be used separately.

[Winning pattern when small hit]
In the present embodiment, the winning symbol at the time of the small hit is only one type of "one-time open small hit symbol". However, in addition to this, for example, another type such as a "twice open small hit pattern" or a "three open small hit pattern" may be prepared. The "small win" as a result of the internal lottery does not trigger the subsequent state to change to the "high probability state" or "time reduction state", so "2 rounds (2 round (2 It is possible to provide a "single opening small hit pattern" without being bound by the regulation of "more than one opening".

Step S2408: Next, the main control CPU72 executes a small hitting variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main control CPU72 determines the variation pattern (variation time and stop display time) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol based on the variation pattern determination random number shifted in the previous step S2200 (variation pattern selection means). ). Further, the main control CPU72 sets the value of the determined fluctuation time in the fluctuation timer, and sets the value of the stop display time in the stop symbol display timer. In the present embodiment, the reach variation pattern can be selected in the case of a small hit, and the variation pattern equivalent to that in the normal deviation can be selected.

Step S2409: Next, the main control CPU72 executes a small hit other setting process. In this process, the main control CPU72 determines the display mode of the stop symbol (small hit symbol) by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 based on the small hit stop symbol number. In addition, the main control CPU72 generates a stop symbol command and a lottery result command (during a small hit) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. These stop symbol commands and lottery result commands are also transmitted to the production control device 124 in the production command transmission processing.

Step S2415: Next, the main control CPU72 executes a special symbol variation start process. In this processing, the main control CPU72 selects the variation pattern data based on the variation pattern number (at the time of falling/at the time of hitting). In addition, the main control CPU72 sets the variation start flag of the special symbol in the flag area of the RAM76. Then, the main control CPU72 generates a variation start command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. This variation start command is also transmitted to the production control device 124 in the production command transmission processing. When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU72 sets the special symbol changing process (step S3000) to the next jump destination, and returns to the special symbol game process.

[Figure 17: Special symbol changing process, special symbol stop display process]
In the special symbol fluctuation process, the main control CPU72 loads the value of the fluctuation timer from the register to the timer counter, and then changes the value of the timer counter according to the passage of time (the count number of the clock pulse or the value of the interrupt counter). Decrement. Then, the main control CPU72 refers to the value of the timer counter, and controls the variable display of the special symbol until the value becomes 0. Then, when the value of the timer counter becomes 0, the main control CPU72 sets the special symbol stop displaying process (step S4000) to the next jump destination, and generates a confirmation command. Here, the "confirmation command" is a command indicating that the special symbol has stopped. The confirmation command is transmitted to the performance control device 124 in the performance command transmission process (step S142 in FIG. 9) executed in the main loop.

Further, in the special symbol stop display process, the main control CPU72 controls the stop display of the special symbol based on the stop symbol determined in the stop symbol determination process (step S2404, step S2407, step S2410 in FIG. 19). Further, the main control CPU72 generates a stop display time end command. The stop display time end command is transmitted to the performance control device 124 in the performance command transmission processing. When the stop symbol is displayed for a predetermined time in the special symbol stop displaying process, the main control CPU72 erases the symbol changing flag.

[Special symbol storage area shift processing]
FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of a special symbol storage area shift process. In the previous special symbol variation pre-processing, if the value of the working memory counter corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol is greater than "0" (step S2100 in FIG. 19: Yes), the main control CPU72 Executes this special symbol storage area shift process. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described.

Step S2210: The main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the oldest one in the existing working memory corresponds to the first special symbol. That is, if the storage area of the RAM 76 is accessed and the oldest working memory among them does not correspond to the first special symbol but corresponds to the second special symbol (No), the main control CPU 72 next The process proceeds to step S2212.

Step S2212: The main control CPU72 designates the second special symbol as the special symbol of the target for shifting the storage area. This designation is performed, for example, by setting "02H" as the target symbol designation value.

Step S2214: On the other hand, when the oldest working memory corresponds to the first special symbol (step S2210: Yes), the main control CPU72 designates the first special symbol as the special symbol of the target for shifting the storage area. .. The designation in this case is performed by setting "01H" as the target symbol designation value, for example.

Step S2216: The main control CPU72 shifts the random number storage area of the RAM76 for the special symbol of the object designated in either step S2212 or step S2214. The specific contents of the processing are as described above in the special symbol variation preprocessing.

Step S2218: Next, the main control CPU72 subtracts the value of the working memory counter for the target special symbol. For example, if the target for shifting the storage area this time is the second special symbol, the main control CPU72 subtracts the value of the working memory counter corresponding to the second special symbol (-1).

Step S2220: Then, the main control CPU72 sets the "variation start time operation memory number" from the value of the operation memory counter after the subtraction. Note that, here, for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the value of the working memory counter may be added and then the "variation start time working memory number" may be set.

Step S2222: Also, the main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the special symbol to be shifted in the storage area this time is the second special symbol.
Step S2224: When the target is the second special symbol (step S2222: Yes), the main control CPU72 sets the working memory number reduction effect command for the second special symbol. The effect command set here is also generated as a command having a length of one word, but its configuration is in contrast to the above-described "effect command for increasing working memory number". That is, the effect command when the number of operating memories decreases is the value of the lower byte (for example, “00H” to “03H”) that indicates the number of operating memories after the reduction, with respect to the preceding value (for example, “BCH”) of the upper byte that indicates the command type. )) is added, and the value of the lower byte is further added (logical sum) with an additional value (for example, “10H”) meaning “reduction in the number of working memory due to consumption”. Therefore, with respect to the lower byte, the second place of the addition value "10H" is logically ORed to become "1", and this value represents "the result (change information) due to the decrease in the number of working memories". Will be things. In other words, if the lower byte of the command is "13H", it means that the number of working memories up to the previous time "4" (command notation is "14H") is decreased by 1, and the number of working memories this time is "3" (command The notation is "13H". Similarly, if the lower byte is "12H" to "10H", it is the result of decreasing the number of working memories "3" to "1" (command notation "13H" to "11H") up to the previous one by one. , That the number of working memories this time has become “2” to “0” (command notation is “12H” to “10H”). The preceding value “BCH” is a value indicating that the effect command this time is the operation memory number command for the second special symbol.

Step S2226: In addition, when the target of this time is the first special symbol (step S2222: No), the main control CPU72 sets the working memory number reduction effect command for the first special symbol. The command in this case is the same as the above except that the preceding value is a value (for example, "BBH") indicating that it is a working memory number command for the first special symbol.

Step S2228: Then, the main control CPU72 executes effect command output processing. This process is for transmitting the effect memory time reduction effect command set in the previous step S2224 or step S2226 to the effect control device 124 (memory number notification means).
When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU72 returns to the special symbol variation preprocessing (FIG. 19).

[Processing during special symbol stop display]
Next, FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special symbol stop displaying process. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described.

Step S4100: The main control CPU72 subtracts the value of the stop symbol display timer (decrements by the interrupt period).

Step S4200: Then, the main control CPU72 determines whether or not the stop display time has ended, based on the value of the stop symbol display timer subtracted this time. Specifically, if the value of the stop symbol display timer is not 0 or less, the main control CPU72 determines that the stop display time has not ended yet (No). In this case, the main control CPU72 returns to the special symbol game process, and also in the next interrupt cycle, jumps from the execution selection process (step S1000 in FIG. 17) to repeatedly execute the special symbol stop displaying process.

On the other hand, if the value of the stop symbol display timer is 0 or less, the main control CPU72 determines that the stop display time has ended (Yes). In this case, the main control CPU72 next executes step S4250.

Step S4250: The main control CPU72 generates a stop display time end command. The stop display time end command is transmitted to the performance control device 124 in the performance command transmission processing. Further, the main control CPU72 erases the symbol changing flag here. The "stop display time end command" is a command indicating that the stop display time of the special symbol has ended (elapsed).

Step S4300: Here, the main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the value (01H) of the big hit flag is set. When the value of the big hit flag (01H) is set (Yes), the main control CPU72 next executes step S4350.

[At the time of winning]
Step S4350: The main control CPU72 sets the jump destination of the jump table to "the big winning variable winning device management process". The main control CPU 72 executes processing for setting various functions to non-operation in this processing. Specifically, the probability variation function is deactivated and the time reduction function is deactivated. As a result, before the special game (major role) is started, the state is shifted to the low probability non-time shortened state.

Step S4400: Then, the main control CPU72 sets "start big job (big hit game)" as an internal state flag on the control. Further, the main control CPU72 sets the value of the continuous operation number status according to the type of big hit symbol. For example, when the type of big hit symbol is “16 round probability variation symbol”, the value corresponding to “16 round” is set in the continuous operation number status. If the type of big hit symbol is “12 round probability variation symbol 1, 2” or “12 round normal symbol”, a value representing “12 round” is set in the continuous operation count status. Furthermore, when the kind of the big hit symbol is “6 round probability variation symbol 1, 2”, the value representing “6 round” is set in the continuous operation number status. Then, the main control CPU72 generates a state command indicating that the big hit. The state command indicating that the big hit is being transmitted to the production control device 124 in the production command transmission processing.

Step S4500: Then, the main control CPU72 generates a continuous operation number command. The continuous operation number command can be generated based on the type of the big hit symbol (stop symbol number) determined in the previous big hit stop symbol determination process (step S2410 in FIG. 19). For example, when the type of big hit symbol is “16 round probability variation symbol”, the continuous operation number command is generated as a value representing “16 round”. Further, when the type of big hit symbol is “12 round probability variation symbol 1, 2” or “12 round normal symbol”, the continuous operation number command is generated as a value representing “12 round”. Furthermore, when the type of the big hit symbol is “6 round probability variation symbol 1, 2”, the continuous operation number command is generated as a value indicating “6 round”. The generated continuous operation number command is transmitted to the production control device 124 in the production command transmission processing.

When the above procedure is completed at the time of a big hit, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process.

[When not elected]
On the other hand, in the case other than the time of big hit, the following procedure is executed.
That is, if the main control CPU72 determines in step S4300 that the value of the big hit flag (01H) is not set (No), then it executes step S4600.

Step S4600: The main control CPU72 then confirms whether or not the value (01H) of the small hit flag is set. Then, if the value of the small hit flag (01H) is not set and it is simply a deviation (No), the main control CPU72 next executes step S4602.

Step S4602: The main control CPU72 sets the address of the special symbol variation preprocessing as the jump destination address of the jump table.

Step S4605: On the other hand, if the value of the small hit flag (01H) is set (step S4600: Yes), the main control CPU72 sets the address of the small winning combination variable winning device management processing as the jump destination address of the jump table. set.

Step S4606: Then, the main control CPU72 sets the "small hit start (in the small hit)" as the internal state flag on the control. Further, the main control CPU72 generates a state command indicating that the small hit. The state command indicating that the small hit is in progress is transmitted to the production control device 124 in the production command transmission processing.

Step S4610: Next, the main control CPU72 loads the value of the frequency cut counter. The "counting counter" has respective counter values set in the probability variation count area and the time saving count area of the RAM 76 in the "high probability state" and the "time reduction state". In the present embodiment, since the so-called number-of-times cut probability variation function is adopted, when shifting to the “high probability time reduction state”, the number-of-times cut counter related to the high probability state is set to a predetermined numerical value (for example, 170 times), The number-of-times cutting counter related to the time reduction state is set to a predetermined value (for example, 170 times or 100 times). Further, when shifting to the “low probability time shortened state”, the frequency cut counter for the high probability state is not set, and the number cut counter for the time shortened state is set to a predetermined numerical value (for example, 100 times).

Step S4620: The main control CPU72 confirms whether the loaded counter value is 0 or not. At this time, if the number-of-times cutting counter value is already 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process. On the other hand, if the number of times cut counter value is not 0 (No), the number of times cut counter value command is generated, and then the main control CPU72 executes step S4630.

Step S4630: The main control CPU72 decrements (counts by 1) the value of the number of times cut counter.
Step S4640: Then, the main control CPU72 determines whether or not the subtraction result is not zero. As a result of the subtraction, when the value of the number-of-times cutting counter is not 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process. On the other hand, when the value of the frequency cut counter becomes 0 (No), the main control CPU72 proceeds to step S4650.

Step S4650: Here, the main control CPU72 resets the flag when the multi-cutting function is activated. In the present embodiment, when shifting to the “high probability time reduction state” corresponding to “any probability variation pattern other than the 6-round probability variation pattern 2”, the high-probability state and the time cut-off counter related to the time reduction state have predetermined numerical values. Since it is set to (for example, 170 times), it is the probability variation function operation flag and the time reduction function operation flag that are reset.

In addition, when shifting to the “high probability time reduction state” corresponding to the 6-round probability variation pattern 2, the frequency cut counter for the high probability state is set to a predetermined numerical value (for example, 170 times), and the number cut counter for the time reduction state is set. Is set to a predetermined numerical value (for example, 100 times). Therefore, it is the time shortening function operation flag that is reset when the 100th variation ends, and the probability variation function operation flag that is reset when the 170th variation ends (advantageous game state transition means). , Special state transition means).

Furthermore, when shifting to the "low probability time reduction state", the number-of-times-counting counter related to the time reduction state is set to a predetermined numerical value (for example, 100 times), so that only the time reduction function operation flag is reset. is there. As a result, the time-reduced state and the high-probability state end after the stop display of the special symbol. After finishing the above procedure, the special symbol game process is returned to.

[Display output management process]
Next, FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the display output management processing (step S232 in FIG. 12) executed in the timer interrupt processing. The display output management process is a special symbol display setting process (step S1200), a normal symbol display setting process (step S1210), a state display setting process (step S1220), an operation memory display setting process (step S1230), and a continuous operation number display setting. This is a configuration including a subroutine group of processing (step S1240).

Of these, the special symbol display setting process (step S1200) and the normal symbol display setting process (step S1210), the operation memory display setting process (step S1230), as described above, the first special symbol display device 34, the second The special symbol display device 35, the normal symbol display device 33, the normal symbol working memory lamp 33a, the first special symbol working memory lamp 34a and the second special symbol working memory lamp 35a generate and output a drive signal to be applied to each LED. It is a process to do.

The state display setting process (step S1220) and the continuous operation number display setting process (step S1240) are processes of generating and outputting a drive signal to be applied to each LED of the game state display device 38. First, in the state display setting process, the main control CPU72 controls lighting of the probability variation state display lamp 38d and the time saving state display lamp 38e according to the value of the probability variation function operation flag or the time reduction function operation flag, respectively. For example, if the probability variation function operation flag is set to the value (01H) when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the LED corresponding to the probability variation state display lamp 38d. The probability variation state display lamp 38d continues to be lit until the big hit game regarding the special symbol is started, or until the probability variation function is turned off after the variation display of the special symbol is performed a prescribed number of times, and then non- The display can be switched (turned off). On the other hand, if the value (01H) is set in the time reduction function operation flag, the main control CPU72 causes the LED corresponding to the time saving state display lamp 38e to emit a lighting signal regardless of whether or not the power is turned on. Is output. Further, the main control CPU72 controls the lighting of the firing position designation lamp 38f according to the special game management status. For example, when the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 is activated by the big hit game or the small hit game, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the LED corresponding to the firing position designation lamp 38f. .. Further, when the value (01H) is set in the time reduction function operation flag, the main control CPU72 outputs a lighting signal to the LED corresponding to the firing position designation lamp 38f in addition to the time reduction state display lamp 38e. .. The firing position designation lamp 38f lights up from the start of the big hit game to the end of the "time shortened state" when the big hit game transitions to the "time shortened state", and does not light up when the "time shortened state" ends. OFF).

Further, the main control CPU72 controls the turning on of the big hit type display lamps 38a, 38b, 38c in the continuous operation number display setting process. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal for any of the big hit type display lamps 38a, 38b, 38c based on the value of the continuous operation number status. At this time, the target of outputting the lighting signal is any of the display lamps 38a, 38b, 38c corresponding to the big hit symbols designated by the value of the continuous operation number status. For example, if the value of the continuous operation count status specifies "16 rounds", the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the lamp 38c representing "16 rounds (16R)". If the value of the continuous operation count status specifies "12 rounds", the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the lamp 38b representing "12 rounds (12R)". Further, if the value of the continuous operation number status specifies "6 rounds", the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the lamp 38a representing "6 rounds (6R)".

[Variable winning device management processing during big hits]
Next, the details of the variable winning device management processing at the time of big hit will be described. FIG. 27 is a flow chart showing a configuration example of the variable winning device management processing at the time of big hit. Big winning variable winning device management processing, big winning game process selection processing (step S5100), big winning big winning opening pattern setting processing (step S5200), big winning big winning opening and closing operation processing (step S5300), big winning big This is a configuration including a subroutine group of a winning opening closing process (step S5400) and a big hit end process (step S5500).

Step S5100: In the big hit game process selection process, the main control CPU72 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (one of steps S5200 to S5500). That is, the main control CPU72 selects the program address of the process to be executed next from the jump table as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the jackpot variable winning device management process as the return address in the stack pointer. Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the process performed so far. For example, if the operation (opening/closing operation) of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 has not been started yet, the main control CPU 72 sets the big winning opening opening pattern as the next jump destination. (Step S5200) is selected. On the other hand, if the jackpot special winning opening opening pattern setting process has already been completed, the main control CPU72 selects the jackpot special winning opening/closing operation process (step S5300) as the next jump destination, and the jackpot large winning opening/closing operation. If the operation processing has been completed, the big winning opening special winning opening closing processing (step S5400) is selected as the next jump destination. When the big winning opening big winning opening opening/closing processing and the big winning opening big winning opening closing processing are repeatedly executed over the set number of continuous operations (round number), the main control CPU 72 ends the big hitting processing as the next jump destination ( Step S5500) is selected. Hereinafter, each processing will be described in more detail.

[Prize winning opening pattern setting process when jackpot]
FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of a big winning opening opening pattern setting process. This process is for setting conditions such as the number of times the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 is opened/closed and the time of each opening during a big hit. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described.

Step S5204: The main control CPU72 executes a symbol-specific open pattern selection process. In this processing, the main control CPU72, according to the winning symbol of this time, the opening pattern of the special winning opening (the number of times of opening of each round and the time of each opening), the interval time between rounds, the number of counts in one round (maximum The number of winnings) and the operation pattern of the probability variation area solenoid 99 are selected. The opening pattern of the special winning opening for each winning symbol, the operation pattern of the probability variation area solenoid 99, and the interval time between rounds are as described in the operation pattern of the variable winning device during the big hit shown in FIG. Note that the number of counts (maximum number of winnings) in one round is basically about 10, but there is almost no winning during opening for an extremely short time (about 0.1 seconds) (impossible). Not very difficult).

Step S5206: The main control CPU72 sets the number of execution rounds in the big hit game of this time, based on the big hit winning symbol selected in the previous big hit stop symbol determination process (step S2410 in FIG. 19). Specifically, if the “16 round probability variation symbol” is selected as the winning symbol, the main control CPU72 sets the number of execution rounds to 16 times. Further, if "12 round probability variation symbol 1 or 2" or "12 round normal symbol" is selected as the winning symbol, the main control CPU72 sets the number of execution rounds to 12 times. Further, if "6 round probability variation symbol 1 or 2" is selected as the winning symbol, the main control CPU72 sets the number of execution rounds to 6 times. The number of execution rounds set here is stored in, for example, the buffer area of the RAM 76 using a corresponding value on the program.

Step S5208: Next, the main control CPU72, based on the special winning opening opening pattern and the operation pattern of the probability variation area solenoid 99 set in the previous step S5204, the jackpot open timer and the probability variation area timer (count the opening time of the probability variation area. Timer). The value of the timer set here becomes the opening time of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31, or the opening time of the probability variation area. In addition, if a time of about 20.0 to 29.0 seconds is set as the value of the big hit open timer and the probability variation area timer, the opening time will be the time of entering the big winning opening or the probability change during one opening. This is a sufficient time for the passage of the area to occur easily (for example, the time for which 10 or more game balls are fired by the firing control board set 174, preferably 6 seconds or more). On the other hand, if 0.1 seconds is set as the value of the big hit open timer and the probability variation area timer, the opening time is not impossible to enter the big winning opening or pass the probability variation area during one opening. In both cases, it is a short time that hardly occurs (becomes difficult) (for example, a time shorter than 1 second, preferably a time shorter than the interval between the game balls shot by the launch control board set 174).

Step S5210: Then, the main control CPU72, based on the special winning opening opening pattern and the operation pattern of the probability variation area solenoid 99 set in the previous step S5204, the big hit time interval timer and the probability variation area interval timer (probability variation area temporarily. Set a timer that counts the waiting time for closing. The value of the timer set here becomes the waiting time between the rounds during the big hit or the temporary closing time of the probability variation region.

Step S5212: When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU72 sets the next jump destination to the big winning opening big winning opening opening/closing operation process, and returns to the big winning variable winning device management processing (FIG. 27).

[Big prize opening/closing operation processing at the time of big hit]
FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of a special winning opening opening/closing operation process during a big hit. This process is for controlling the opening/closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 at the time of a big hit. The procedure will be described below.

Step S5301: The main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the special winning opening interval timer is counting down. Specifically, it is possible to confirm whether or not the special winning opening interval timer is counting down by checking whether or not the special winning opening interval timer set in step S5314 below is already in operation. it can.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the special winning opening interval timer is counting down (Yes), the main control CPU72 executes step S5314. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the special winning opening interval timer is counting down (No), the main control CPU72 executes step S5302.

Step S5302: The main control CPU72 opens the first special winning opening or the second special winning opening. Specifically, based on the operation pattern of the variable winning device during the big hit shown in FIG. 18, a drive signal to be applied to the first special winning opening solenoid 90 or the second special winning opening solenoid 97 is output. As a result, the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 operates and shifts from the closed state to the open state.

Step S5303: Next, the main control CPU72 executes a release timer countdown process. In this processing, the countdown of the opening timer set in the previous big winning opening big winning opening opening pattern setting processing (step S5208 in FIG. 28) is executed.

Step S5303a: The main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the probability variation area interval timer is counting down. Specifically, by checking whether or not the probability variation area interval timer set in step S5314 below is already operating, it is possible to check whether the probability variation area interval timer is counting down.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the probability variation area interval timer is counting down (Yes), the main control CPU72 executes step S5314. On the other hand, when it is not possible to confirm that the probability variation region interval timer is counting down (No), the main control CPU72 executes step S5304.

Step S5304: the main control CPU72 executes a probability variation area opening process. Specifically, the drive signal to be applied to the probability variation area solenoid 99 is output based on the operation pattern of the variable winning device during the big hit shown in FIG. As a result, the probability variation area vane member 31d is opened, and the game ball can be guided to the probability variation area disposed inside the second variable winning device 31.

Step S5305: Next, the main control CPU72 executes the probability variation area timer countdown processing. In this process, the certainty variation area timer countdown set in the previous big winning prize special opening opening pattern setting process (step S5208 in FIG. 28) is executed.

Step S5306: Subsequently, the main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the special winning opening opening time has ended. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the open timer after the countdown process is 0 or less, and if the value of the open timer is not 0 or less (No), the main control CPU72 then proceeds to step S5307a. To execute.

Step S5307a: Subsequently, the main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the probability variation area opening time has ended. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the probability variation area timer after the countdown process is 0 or less, and if the value of the open timer is not 0 or less (No), the main control CPU72 executes step S5308. Execute.

On the other hand, when the value of the probability variation region timer is 0 or less (Yes), the main control CPU72 executes step S5307b.

Step S5307b: Probability variation area closing processing is executed. Specifically, the process of stopping the output of the drive signal applied to the probability variation area solenoid 99 is executed. As a result, the probability variation area vane member 31d is closed, and the game ball cannot be guided to the probability variation area disposed inside the second variable winning device 31.

Step S5308: The main control CPU72 executes a winning ball number counting process. In this process, the number of game balls that have won the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 (the first big winning opening or the second big winning opening being opened) within the opening time is counted. Specifically, the main control CPU72 increments the value of the count number based on the winning detection signal input from the first count switch 84 or the second count switch 85 within the opening time.

Step S5310: Next, the main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the current count number is less than a predetermined number (10). This predetermined number defines the upper limit of the number of winning balls (upper limit of the number of prize balls) allowed per opening (one round of the big hit). If the number of counts has not yet reached the predetermined number (Yes), the main control CPU72 returns to the jackpot variable winning device management process. Then, when the big winning variable winning device management processing is executed next time, the main control CPU72 repeats the procedure of steps S5301 to S5310 because the jump destination is set to the big winning opening opening/closing operation processing at this stage. To do.

When determining in step S5306 that the special winning opening time has ended (Yes) or confirming that the count number has reached the predetermined number in step S5310 (No), the main control CPU72 next executes step S5312. ..

Step S5312: The main control CPU72 closes the first special winning opening or the second special winning opening. Specifically, the output of the drive signal applied to the first special winning opening solenoid 90 or the second special winning opening solenoid 97 is stopped. As a result, the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 shifts from the open state to the closed state.

Step S5313: The main control CPU72 executes a probability variation region closing process. Specifically, the process of stopping the output of the drive signal applied to the probability variation area solenoid 99 is executed. As a result, the probability variation area vane member 31d is closed, and the game ball cannot be guided to the probability variation area disposed inside the second variable winning device 31.

Step S5314: Next, the main control CPU72 executes an interval timer countdown process. In this processing, the main control CPU72 executes the countdown of the special winning opening interval timer and the probability variation area interval timer set in the big winning opening special opening opening pattern setting processing (step S5210 in FIG. 28).

Step S5315: The main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the special winning opening interval time is over. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the special winning opening interval timer after the countdown process is 0 or less, and if the value of the special winning opening interval timer is not equal to or less than 0 (No), the main control The CPU 72 returns to the end address of the variable winning device management processing (FIG. 27) at the time of big hit. Then, when the big winning opening opening/closing operation process at the time of big hit is executed in the next call, the process jumps from the first step S5301 and directly executes step S5314. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the value of the special winning opening interval timer after the countdown processing has become 0 or less (Yes), the main control CPU72 executes step S5318.

Step S5318: The main control CPU72 increments the value of the opening number counter. The value of the opening counter is stored in the count area of the RAM 76 with an initial value of 0, for example.

Step S5320: The main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the value of the release number counter after increment has reached the number set in the current round. Here, the reason why the "number of times set in the current round" is judged is, for example, "to open the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 multiple times in one round during a big hit". This is to correspond to the opening pattern. In this embodiment, such an opening pattern is not adopted, and the “number of times set in the current round” is set to once in each round. Therefore, in each round of the big hit game, the counter value reaches the set number of times in one opening/closing operation (Yes), and the main control CPU72 proceeds to step S5322.

On the other hand, when the pattern in which the opening/closing operation is repeated a plurality of times in one round is adopted, the counter value has not yet reached the set number at the end of one opening (No). In this case, when the main control CPU72 returns to the big winning variable winning a prize device management processing, the jump destination is set to the big winning opening opening/closing operation processing at the present stage, so the steps S5301 to S5320 are repeatedly executed. To do. As a result, in step S5318, the increment of the opening number counter proceeds, and when the counter value reaches the set number (Yes), the main control CPU72 proceeds to step S5322.

Step S5322: The main control CPU72 sets the next jump destination to the big winning opening closing process at the time of big hit, and returns to the variable winning device managing process at big hit. Then, when the big winning time variable winning device management processing is executed next, the main control CPU72 next executes the big winning opening closing processing.

[Large winning prize closing process at the time of big hit]
FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of a big winning opening closing process at the time of a big hit. The big winning opening closing process at the time of big hit is for continuing the operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31, or for ending the operation thereof. The procedure will be described below.

Step S5402: The main control CPU72 increments the round number counter. As a result, for example, the value of the round number counter becomes "1" at the stage of finishing the first round and proceeding to the second round.

Step S5404: The main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the value of the incremented round number counter has reached the set number of execution rounds. Specifically, the main control CPU72 refers to the value (1 to 15) of the incremented round number counter, and if the value is less than the set number of execution rounds (1 to 15 after subtraction) (No). Then, step S5405 is executed.

Step S5405: The main control CPU72 generates a round number command from the current value of the round number counter. This command is transmitted to the production control device 124 in the production command transmission processing. The production control device 124 can confirm the current round number based on the received round number command.

Step S5406: The main control CPU72 sets the next jump destination to the big winning opening opening/closing operation process at the time of big hit.

Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU72 resets the winning ball number counter, and returns to the jackpot variable winning device management process.

When the main control CPU72 next executes the big hit time variable winning device management processing, the main control CPU72 in the big hit game process selection processing (step S5100 in FIG. 27), the big hit time big winning opening opening/closing processing which is the next jump destination. To execute. After executing the big winning opening/winning mouth opening/closing operation processing, the main control CPU72 executes the big winning opening/winning special opening opening closing processing again, and repeatedly executes steps S5402 to S5408. To do. As a result, the opening/closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 is continuously executed until the actual number of rounds reaches the set number of execution rounds (9 times or 16 times).

When the actual number of rounds reaches the set number of execution rounds (step S5404: Yes), the main control CPU72 next executes step S5410.

Step S5410, Step S5412: In this case, the main control CPU72 resets the round number counter (=0), and sets the next jump destination to the big hit end processing.

Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU72 resets the winning ball number counter, and returns to the jackpot variable winning device management process. As a result, when the main control CPU72 next executes the big winning time variable winning device management processing, this time the big winning time ending processing is selected.

[End processing at the time of big hit]
FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the big hit end processing. This big hit end processing is for adjusting the conditions for ending the operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 during the big hit. Hereinafter, description will be given along with an example of the procedure.

Step S5501: The main control CPU72 executes the big hit end time timer countdown processing. In this processing, the main control CPU 72 sets an initial value in the jackpot end time timer, and then counts down the timer (every time this module is called) as time elapses.

Step S5502: Next, the main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the big hit end time has elapsed. Specifically, if the value of the big hit end time timer is not yet 0, the main control CPU72 determines that the big hit end time has not elapsed (No). In this case, the main control CPU72 terminates this module and returns to the jackpot variable winning device management processing (FIG. 27).

After that, when the value of the jackpot end time timer becomes 0 with the passage of time, the main control CPU72 determines that the jackpot end time has passed (Yes), and executes step S5503 and thereafter.

Step S5503, Step S5504: The main control CPU72 resets the big hit flag (00H). As a result, the jackpot gaming state ends on the control processing of the main control CPU72. Further, the main control CPU72 erases "big hit" from the internal state flag here and declares the end of the major role as the internal state in the control processing. The main control CPU 72 resets the value of the continuous operation number status.

Step S5506: Next, the main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the value (01H) of the probability variation function operation flag is set. This flag is set in the previous switch input event process (step S28 in FIG. 13).

Step S5508: When the value of the probability variation function operation flag is set (step S5506: Yes), the main control CPU72 sets the probability variation number (for example, 170 times). The set value of the number of times of probability variation is stored in, for example, the probability variation counter area of the RAM 76 and becomes the number-of-times cutting counter value. The number of times of probability variation set here is the upper limit number of times that the variation of the special symbol (internal lottery) will be performed in a high probability state in subsequent games. In the present embodiment, since a substantial upper limit is set for the high-probability state, the high-probability state may return to the low-probability state without obtaining a winning result (so-called number-of-times probability change). If the value of the probability variation function operation flag is not set (step S5506: No), the main control CPU72 does not execute step S5508.

Step S5510: Next, the main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the value (01H) of the time reduction function operation flag is set. This flag is set in the big hit other setting process (step S2414 in FIG. 19) during the previous special symbol variation preprocessing.

Step S5512: Then, when the value of the time reduction function operation flag is set (step S5510: Yes), the main control CPU72 sets the number of time reductions (for example, 100 times or 170 times). Here, which time saving number is set depends on the value of the probability variation function operation flag. That is, the main control CPU72 sets 170 times as the time saving number if the value of the probability variation function operation flag is set (high probability time reduction state transition means, advantageous game state transition means), and the value of the probability variation function operation flag. If is not set, 100 times is set as the number of time reductions (low probability time reduction state transition means, advantageous game state transition means). However, the main control CPU72, even if the value of the probability variation function operation flag is set, if the winning symbol corresponds to the 6 round probability variation symbol 2, sets 100 times as the number of time saving (advantageous game) State transition means, special state transition means). The set value of the hour/hour count is stored in the hour/hour count area of the RAM 76. The number of times saved here is the upper limit number for shortening the variation time of the special symbol in the subsequent games. If the value of the time reduction function operation flag is not set (step S5510: No), the main control CPU72 does not execute step S5512.

Step S5514: Then, the main control CPU72 generates a state designation command based on various flags. Specifically, with the reset of the big hit flag or the end of the big role, a state designation command representing "normal" is generated as the game state. If the probability variation function operation flag is set, a state designation command representing "high probability middle" is generated as the internal state, and if the time reduction function operation flag is set, the state reduction is "time reduction in progress". Is generated. These state designation commands are transmitted to the performance control device 124 in the performance command transmission processing.

Step S5516: After going through the above procedure, the main control CPU72 sets the next jump destination to the big winning opening opening pattern setting process.

Step S5518: Then, the main control CPU72 sets the jump destination in the execution selection process (step S1000 in FIG. 17) in the special symbol game process to the special symbol variation preprocess. After completing the above procedure, the main control CPU72 returns to the jackpot variable winning device management process.

[Variable winning device management processing during small hits]
Next, the details of the variable winning device management processing at the time of a small hit will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the variable winning device management processing at the time of a small hit. The variable winning a prize device management process at the time of a small hit is a game process selection process at the time of a small hit (step S6100), a large winning a prize opening pattern setting process at a small hit (step S6200), and a large winning a prize opening/closing process at a small hit (step S6300). , The small winning big winning opening closing process (step S6400) and the small winning end process (step S6500) are included.

Step S6100: In the small hit game process selection process, the main control CPU72 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (one of steps S6200 to S6500). That is, the main control CPU72 selects the program address of the process to be executed next from the jump table as the address of the jump destination, and sets the end of the variable winning device management processing at the time of small hits as the return address in the stack pointer. .. Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the process performed so far. For example, if the operation (opening/closing operation) of the first variable winning device 30 has not been started yet, the main control CPU72 selects the small winning big winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S6200) as the next jump destination. To do. On the other hand, if the small winning big winning opening opening pattern setting process has already been completed, the main control CPU72 selects the small winning big winning opening opening/closing process (step S6300) as the next jump destination, and the small winning large If the winning opening opening/closing operation processing is completed, the small winning big winning opening closing processing (step S6400) is selected as the next jump destination. When the small winning big winning opening opening/closing processing and the small winning large winning opening closing processing are repeatedly executed over the set number of consecutive operations, the main control CPU 72 determines the small hitting end processing (step) as the next jump destination. S6500) is selected. Hereinafter, each processing will be described in more detail.

[Prize winning opening pattern setting process for small hits]
FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a big winning opening opening pattern setting process at the time of a small hit. This processing is for setting conditions such as the number of times the first variable winning device 30 is opened/closed and the time of each opening during a small hit. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described.

Step S6212: The main control CPU72 sets the "small hitting open pattern". In the case of the present embodiment, for the “small hitting opening pattern”, for example, the opening pattern of “0.1 second opening” is set for the first time and the second time, respectively. Since there is no concept of “round” for “small hit”, the “open pattern” is also expressed as “first open” or “second open”.

Step S6214: The main control CPU72 sets the number of times of opening the special winning opening to, for example, two times, based on the special winning opening opening pattern set in the previous step S6212. The number of releases set here is stored in, for example, the buffer area of the RAM 76.

Step S6216: Next, the main control CPU72 sets the small hit opening timer. The value of the timer set here is the opening time per operation when activating the first variable winning device 30. In the present embodiment, the value of the small hitting open timer is set to 0.1 seconds, and during such an open time, the winning at the special winning opening hardly occurs during one opening (it is difficult. It will be a short time (for example, a time shorter than 1 second, preferably a time shorter than the interval between the game balls emitted by the projecting device unit).

Step S6218: The main control CPU72 sets the small hit time interval timer. The value of the timer set here is a waiting time for each opening/closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 a plurality of times during a small hit, and this timer value is set to about 2 seconds, for example.

Step S6220: When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU72 sets the next jump destination to the small winning big winning opening opening/closing operation process, and returns to the small winning variable winning device managing process (FIG. 32). Then, the main control CPU72 executes a small winning big winning opening opening and closing operation process (step S6300).

[Large winning opening opening/closing operation processing for small hits]
FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a big winning opening opening/closing operation process at the time of a small hit. This process is for controlling the opening/closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 at the time of a small hit. The procedure will be described below.

Step S6301: The main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the interval timer is counting down. Specifically, by checking whether or not the interval timer set in step S6314 below is already operating, it is possible to check whether or not the interval timer is counting down.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the interval timer is counting down (Yes), the main control CPU72 executes step S6314. On the other hand, if it is not possible to confirm that the interval timer is counting down (No), the main control CPU72 executes step S6302.

Step S6302: The main control CPU72 opens the first special winning opening. Specifically, the drive signal applied to the first special winning opening solenoid 90 is output. As a result, the first variable winning device 30 operates and shifts from the closed state to the open state.

Step S6304: Next, the main control CPU72 executes a release timer countdown process. In this process, a countdown of the opening timer set in the previous small winning big winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S6216 in FIG. 33) is executed.

Step S6306: Subsequently, the main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the opening time has expired. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the open timer after the countdown process is 0 or less. If the value of the open timer is not 0 or less (No), the main control CPU72 then proceeds to step S6308. To execute.

Step S6308: The main control CPU72 executes a winning ball number counting process. In this process, the number of game balls that have won the first variable winning device 30 (the first big winning opening being opened) within the opening time is counted. Specifically, the main control CPU72 increments the value of the count number based on the winning detection signal input from the first count switch 84 within the opening time.

Step S6310: Next, the main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the current count number is less than a predetermined number (10). This predetermined number defines the upper limit of the number of winning balls (upper limit of the number of prize balls) allowed per one opening (one opening at the time of a small hit). If the number of counts has not reached the predetermined number (Yes), the main control CPU72 returns to the small-winning variable winning device management process (FIG. 32). Then, when the small hitting variable winning device management processing is executed, the main control CPU72 executes the procedure of steps S6301 to S6310 because the jump destination is set to the small winning opening special winning opening/closing operation processing at this stage. Execute repeatedly.

When determining in step S6306 that the opening time has ended (Yes) or confirming that the count number has reached the predetermined number in step S6310 (No), the main control CPU72 then executes step S6312. Here, since the value of the opening timer is set to a short time for the opening at the time of the small hit, the main control CPU72 normally performs the step before confirming that the count number has reached the predetermined number in step S6310. In most cases, it is determined in S6306 that the opening time has expired.

Step S6312: The main control CPU72 closes the first special winning opening. Specifically, the output of the drive signal applied to the first special winning opening solenoid 90 is stopped. As a result, the first variable winning device 30 returns from the open state to the closed state.

Step S6314: Next, the main control CPU72 executes an interval timer countdown process. In this process, the main control CPU72 executes the countdown of the interval timer set in the small winning big winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S6218 in FIG. 33).

Step S6315: the main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the interval time has ended. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the interval timer after the countdown processing is 0 or less, and if the value of the interval timer is not 0 or less (No), the main control CPU 72 is variable at the time of small hit. It returns to the end address of the winning device management processing (FIG. 32). Then, when the small winning big winning opening opening/closing operation process is executed in the next call, the process jumps from step S6301 at the beginning and directly executes step S6314. On the other hand, if it is confirmed that the value of the interval timer after the countdown process has become 0 or less (Yes), the main control CPU72 executes step S6316.

Step S6316: The main control CPU72 sets the next jump destination to the small winning big winning opening closing process, and returns to the small winning variable winning device managing process. Then, when the small winning variable winning a prize device management process is executed next, the main control CPU72 next executes a small winning big winning opening closing process.

[Large winning opening closing process when small hit]
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a big winning opening closing process at the time of a small hit. The small winning big winning opening closing process is for continuing the operation of the first variable winning device 30 or for ending the operation thereof. The procedure will be described below.

Step S6412: The main control CPU72 increments the value of the opening number counter.

Step S6414: Next, the main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the value of the incremented release number counter has reached the set release number. The number of times of opening is set in the previous special winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S6214 in FIG. 33). If the value of the opening counter does not reach the set opening number (No), the main control CPU72 executes step S6416.

Step S6416: The main control CPU72 sets the next jump destination to the big winning opening opening/closing operation process at the time of small hit.
Step S6430: Then, the main control CPU72 resets the winning ball number counter, and returns to the variable winning device management processing at the time of small hit (FIG. 32).

When the main control CPU72 next executes the variable winning device management process, in the small hitting game process selection process (step S6100 in FIG. 32), the main control CPU72 opens and closes the small winning a prize hole opening and closing process which is the next jump destination. To execute. Then, after executing the small winning big winning opening opening/closing operation process, the main control CPU72 executes again the small winning large winning opening closing process until the actual opening number reaches the set opening number (two times). The opening/closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 is repeatedly executed.

When the actual number of times of opening at the time of small hit reaches the set number of times of opening (step S6414: Yes), the main control CPU72 next executes step S6418.

Steps S6418, S6420: In this case, the main control CPU72 resets the opening number counter (=0), and sets the next jump destination to the small hitting end processing.

Step S6430: Then, the main control CPU72 resets the winning ball number counter, and returns to the variable winning device management processing at the time of small hit (FIG. 32). As a result, when the main control CPU72 next executes the variable winning device management process, the small hitting end process is selected this time.

[End processing for small hits]
FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a small hitting end process. This small hitting end process is for adjusting the conditions for ending the operation of the first variable winning device 30 during the small hit. Hereinafter, description will be given along with an example of the procedure.

Step S6502: The main control CPU72 executes a small hitting end time timer countdown process. In this processing, the main control CPU72 sets an initial value to the small hitting end time timer, and then counts down the timer (every time this module is called) with the lapse of time.

Step S6504: Next, the main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the small hitting end time has elapsed. Specifically, if the value of the small hitting end time timer is not yet 0, the main control CPU72 determines that the small hitting end time has not elapsed (No). In this case, the main control CPU72 terminates this module and returns to the small-winning variable winning device management processing (FIG. 32).

After that, when the value of the small hitting end time timer becomes 0 with the lapse of time, the main control CPU72 determines that the small hitting end time has elapsed (Yes), and executes step S6506 and subsequent steps.

Step S6506, Step S6508: The main control CPU72 resets the value of the small hit flag (00H), and erases "in small hit" from the internal state flag to end the small hit game. In the case of a small hit, the internal conditioner does not operate in particular, so such a procedure is merely intended to clear the flag.

Step S6510: After going through the above procedure, the main control CPU72 sets the next jump destination to the big winning opening opening pattern setting process at the time of small hit.

Step S6512: Then, the main control CPU72 sets the jump destination in the execution selection process (step S1000 in FIG. 17) in the special symbol game process to the special symbol variation preprocess. When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU72 returns to the small winning variable winning device management process.

[Game Flow (1)]
FIG. 37 is a diagram illustrating a game flow developed when the “12 round normal symbol” or the “12 round probability variation symbol 1, 2” is applied in the normal mode.
When the game is started on the pachinko machine 1, the game is started from the [F1] normal mode. "Normal mode", the winning probability of the special symbol is "low probability state", and the winning probability of the ordinary symbol is "low probability state". In this way, since the [F1] normal mode is in the "low probability non-time shortened state", by inserting the game ball into the middle start winning port 26, the first special symbol starts changing and the game is started. I will proceed.

In [F1] normal mode, if you win the big hit of [F2] "12 round normal design", [F3] 12 round big hit game (battle bonus) is executed, and [F4] you lose the battle during the big role. , [F5] Transition to coast mode.

[F5] The coast mode is a low probability time reduction state. [F5] In the coast mode, if the winning result is not obtained and the [F6] special symbol fluctuates 100 times, the process shifts to the [F1] normal mode.

[F1] In the normal mode, if you win the big hit of [F7] "12 round probability variation symbols 1 and 2", [F3] 12 round big hit game (battle bonus) is executed, and [F8] In the battle during the big role. win.

Then, in the sixth round of the [F9] 12-round big hit game, when the game ball passes through the probability variation area (when a V prize is won), [F10] an effect indicating that a V prize has occurred is executed, and [F11] fireworks Move to rush.

[F11] The firework rush is in a high probability time shortened state. In [F11] fireworks rush, if the result of the winning is not obtained and the [F12] special symbol fluctuates 170 times, it shifts to the [F1] normal mode.

On the other hand, if the game ball does not pass through the probability variation area in the sixth round of the big hit game, although it corresponds to [F13] "12 round probability variation symbols 1 and 2" (if no V prize is won), [F10] V An effect indicating that no winning has occurred is executed, and the mode shifts to [F5] coast mode.

[Game Flow (Part 2)]
FIG. 38 is a diagram illustrating a game flow that is developed when the “16 round probability variation pattern” or the “6 round probability variation pattern 1 or 2” is applied in the fireworks rush or coast mode.
[F5] Coast mode or [F11] If you win the jackpot of [G1] "16 round probability variation pattern" in fireworks rush, [G2] 16 round jackpot game (special bonus) is executed.

[G3] When the game ball passes the probability variation area in the sixth round of the 16-round big hit game (when a V prize is won), [G4] an effect indicating that a V prize is generated is executed, and the big hit game is ended. Afterwards, it shifts to [F11] fireworks rush.

On the other hand, although it corresponds to the [G5] 16 round probability variation pattern, if the game ball does not pass through the probability variation area in the sixth round of the big hit game (when no V prize is won), [G6] V prize does not occur. The effect indicating that is done is executed, and after the big hit game is over, the [F5] coast mode is entered.

[F5] Coast mode or [F11] If you win the big hit of [G10] "6 round probability variation pattern 1, 2" in fireworks rush, [G11] 6 round big hit game (normal bonus effect) is executed.

[G12] When the game ball passes through the probability variation area in the sixth round of the 6-round big hit game (when a V prize is won), [G13] an effect indicating that a V prize has occurred is executed, and the big hit game ends. Afterwards, it shifts to [F11] fireworks rush.

On the other hand, if [G14] "6 round probability variation symbols 1 and 2" is met, but the game ball does not pass through the probability variation area in the 6th round of the big hit game (if no V prize is won), [G15] V The effect indicating that no winning has occurred is executed, and then the [F5] coast mode is entered. In addition, although not shown in particular, it corresponds to "6 round probability variation pattern 2", and when 100 changes have passed after shifting to fireworks rush, it shifts to normal mode, but internally it becomes a high probability non-time shortened state. ing.

It should be noted that the above game flow shows an example of a typical game flow, and does not cover all the flow of games.

[Example of effect image]
Next, the effect image actually displayed on the liquid crystal display 42 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described with some examples. As described above, when the big hit internal lottery is performed in the pachinko machine 1, the variation pattern (variation time) is determined under the control of the main control CPU 72, and the variation display by the first special symbol and the second special symbol is performed. Be displayed (pattern display means). However, since the first special symbol and the second special symbol themselves are lighting/blinking display by the 7-segment LED, they are poor in appealing power in appearance. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, the variable display effect using the effect pattern is performed.

The effect symbols include, for example, three effect symbols including a left effect symbol, a middle effect symbol, and a right effect symbol, which are displayed side by side on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 in the left, middle, and right directions (see FIG. 1). ). Each effect design is, for example, a design of a picture card to which a character is attached together with the numbers "1" to "9". Here, the left effect symbol, the middle effect symbol, and the right effect symbol all constitute a symbol row in which the numbers are arranged in descending order of "9" to "1". Such a symbol string is variably displayed so as to vertically flow (scroll) in the left area, the middle area, and the right area on the screen.

FIG. 39 is a continuous view showing an example of effect images corresponding to variable display and stop display of special symbols. It should be noted that here, regarding the variation of the special symbol at the time of non-winning (out), an example of the variation display effect and the stop display effect (result display effect) performed using the effect symbol is shown. This variable display effect corresponds to a series of effects that are performed from the start of variable display of the special symbol (here, the first special symbol, but it may be the second special symbol) to the stop display. To do. The stop display effect is an effect in which the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and the result of the internal lottery at that time is expressed as a combination of the effect symbols. Here, first, before describing the specific contents of the control process, a basic flow of the variation display effect and the stop display effect for each variation employed in the present embodiment will be described.

[Before change display]
In FIG. 39 (A): For example, in a state before the first special symbol starts changing (a state where the demonstration effect is not in progress), a row of three effect symbols is displayed large in the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. ing. At this time, in accordance with the stop display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the effect symbol is also stopped and displayed.

[Memory display effect]
Further, in the pre-change display area X1 at the bottom of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, markers (indicated by reference symbols M1 and M2 in the drawing) indicating the number of working memories of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed. ing. As for these markers M1 and M2, the respective display numbers represent the first special symbol, the operation memory number of the second special symbol (the display number of the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a). And, the number of displays increases or decreases in conjunction with the change in the number of working memories during the game.

As for the markers M1 and M2, in order to facilitate visual discrimination, the marker M1 corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed, for example, in the shape of a circle (◯), and the marker M2 corresponding to the second special symbol is, for example, a heart. It is displayed as a figure. In the example shown in the figure, all four markers M1 are lit to indicate that the number of working memories of the first special symbol is four, and all the markers M2 are non-display (shown by broken lines). Indicates that the number of working memories of the second special symbol is 0 (memory display effect).

Further, during the variable display of the effect symbols, for example, a fourth symbol (with reference symbols Z1 and Z2 in the figure) is displayed at the upper right of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. The fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are "fourth effect symbols" following the left/middle/right effect symbols, and during variable display of effect symbols, they are variably displayed in synchronization with this. It should be noted that the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are merely simple marks (for example, a figure of "□") colored, and for example, variable display can be expressed by changing the display color. The fourth symbol Z1 corresponds to the first special symbol, and the fourth symbol Z2 corresponds to the second special symbol.

Further, the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, white display color) corresponding to the deviation. This is for objectively clarifying that the stop display effect is correctly performed and the pachinko machine 1 is operating normally. Therefore, if the result of the internal lottery is actually "6 round jackpot", "12 round jackpot", or "16 round jackpot" instead of "defeat", a mode corresponding to them (for example, blue display color or red display color) Etc.), the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are stopped and displayed.

[Begin changing display]
In FIG. 39 (B): For example, in synchronization with the start of the variation of the first special symbol, the variable display effect is started by the scroll variation of the three symbol rows on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42 (the symbol effect. Execution means). That is, in synchronization with the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol, the display of the left effect symbol, the middle effect symbol, and the right effect symbol in the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42 is scrolled vertically (flowing) so that the variable display is performed. The production is started. Further, the markers M1 and M2 are displayed in the pre-change display area X1 of the strip portion in the lower part of the liquid crystal display 42 before the start of the change, but are displayed in the lower left part of the liquid crystal display 42 after the start of the change. It moves to the changing display area X2 based on the displayed pedestal image and continues to be displayed until the change of the special symbol (effect symbol) is stopped and displayed (memorized image display maintaining effect). In addition, in the figure, the variable display of the effect design is simply indicated by a downward arrow. Also, during the variable display, the individual effect symbols are displayed in a transparent state (transparent display), and at this time, the background image of the effect symbol is displayed in the display screen in a state where it is easy to see. Has been done.

In this case, the background image represents a scene in which a female character wearing a yukata is sitting on a chaise lounge and relaxing as if he or she is in the evening cool. Such a background image expresses that the stay mode in the production is, for example, the “normal mode”. In the present embodiment, the “normal mode” corresponds to a normal state in which the time reduction function is inactive and the probability variation function is inactive. In addition to this, various modes are provided for production, and a background image having a different landscape or scene is prepared for each mode (state display production execution means). The difference between these modes may correspond to an internal “time reduction state” or a “high probability state”. Although not shown in particular here, it is also possible to adopt a mode in which the notice production is performed after that, for example, by displaying an image of a character, an item, or the like in the display screen.

Further, during the variable display of the effect symbol, the fourth symbol Z1 is variably displayed at the upper right of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and the fourth symbol Z1 expresses the variable display by changing its display color.

[Stop left pattern]
In FIG. 39(C): For example, when a certain amount of time (about half of the change time) has passed, the left effect design first stops changing. In this example, the effect symbol representing the number "8" is stopped at the left side position of the screen. Note that the illustration of the background image is omitted here (the same applies hereafter).

[Demonstration example when the number of working memories decreases]
Here, as shown in (B) in FIG. 39, since the number of working memories of the first special symbol decreases by one with the start of variation, the number of markers M1 displayed is linked with that. It has been reduced by one. For example, if there are four working memory numbers by then, only one of the oldest (old) memory number display in the marker M1 is moved to the changing display area X2, and the effect consumed by the internal lottery is also combined. Done. As a result, it is possible to teach the player that the working memory number has been consumed for the first special symbol even in the production.

Then, in the example of (C) in FIG. 39, since the marker M1 at the head in the storage order is moved to the changing display area X2, the remaining display in the pre-change display area X1 is three. An effect is produced in which the three markers M1 remaining on the screen are displaced by one each in one direction (here, to the left). As a result, the context of the change in the number of working memories is accurately expressed on the performance, and for the player, "the working memory is consumed and decreased by one" and "the working memory is consumed and a special symbol is given. Is fluctuating” can be taught intuitively and easily.

[Right production design stop]
In FIG. 39 (D): Following the left effect design, the right effect design stops changing thereafter. In this example, the effect symbol representing the number "3" is stopped at the inner position of the screen. Since it has already been determined that a reach state will not occur at this point, it is almost apparent that the change this time is a non-reach (normal) change. Here, reach variation due to a slip pattern or the like is excluded. The "slip pattern" means, for example, once the effect design representing the number "7" has stopped, the design row slides by one design and the effect design representing the number "8" stops, and thereby develops to reach. Is to do. Alternatively, once the effect symbol representing the number “9” has stopped, the symbol string slips backward by one symbol and the effect symbol representing the number “8” stops, and thus the pattern that develops to reach is also stopped. is there. In addition, after the production symbol representing a completely different number such as "5" is once stopped, when a character appears on the screen and the right production symbol sequence is changed again, the number "8" is represented. There is also a pattern in which production patterns stop and develop into reach.

[Stop display effect]
In FIG. 39 (E): In synchronization with the stop display of the first special symbol, the last medium effect symbol is stopped. If the result of the internal lottery this time is non-winning, and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the non-winning (out) mode, the effect display is also stopped and displayed in the non-winning (outside) mode. Be seen. That is, in the illustrated example, the effect symbol representing the number "1" is stopped at the middle position of the screen, and in this case, the effect symbol combination is "8"-"1"-"3". Since it is a gap, it is expressed in the production that the fluctuation this time corresponds to a normal “delamination”. At this time, the fourth symbol Z1 is stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, white display color) corresponding to the deviation.

Further, when the stop display effect is performed, the marker M1 which has moved to the changing display area X2 and continued to be displayed is also hidden. Therefore, it is possible to intuitively and easily teach the player that "the change of the special symbol has ended".

The above is an example of the variable display effect and the stop display effect (at the time of non-winning) performed by using the effect symbol for each change. Through such an effect, the player can be expected to win, and finally the result of the internal lottery can be clearly taught on the effect.

Further, although the above-described example is for non-winning, after the reach effect is executed during the variable display effect during the big hit (winning), the effect symbol is stopped and displayed in the big hit mode in the stop display effect. At this time, the stop display mode of the effect symbol basically corresponds to the winning symbol (stop display mode of the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35) internally selected by the main control CPU 72. Selected.

[Demonstration example during a big hit]
Next, an example of an effect at the time of a big hit (winning) will be described.
FIG. 40 is a continuous diagram showing the flow of the super reach effect executed during the variable display of the special symbols. The super reach effect is a reach effect that is executed in association with the change display in which a medium change time (for example, 50 to 100 seconds) is selected.

Although the flow of the super reach effect executed at the time of the big hit is described here, the super reach effect is executed at a relatively low rate not only at the time of the big hit but also at the time of the hit. Further, here, in addition to the reach effect, a variable display effect, a stop display effect, and a notice effect are included. In addition, an example of the notice effect (pre-reach notice effect, post-reach notice effect) executed during the variable display effect will be described.

The reach production below is, for example, after the variable display according to the variation pattern at the time of the big hit is performed on the first special symbol display device 34, the first special symbol is a big hit mode (for example, "self" and "yo" of the 7-segment LED). , “Mouth”, “Mimi”, “F”, “E”, “L”, “Γ”, etc.) are executed (reach effect execution means). In addition, in FIG. 40, each effect symbol is simplified and shown only in the figure. Further, the markers M1 and M2, the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2, the display area before change X1 and the display area during change X2 are omitted (the same applies to the following drawings). Hereinafter, description will be given along the flow of the production.

[Variable display production]
In FIG. 40 (A): For example, the columns of the left effect symbol, the middle effect symbol, and the right effect symbol on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 are in the vertical direction (for example, from the top in synchronization with the variation start of the first special symbol). The variable display effect is started by scrolling downward.

[Preliminary notice production before reach (first stage)]
40(B): Next, in the relatively early stage of the variable display effect, the first-stage pre-reach advance notice effect using the picture image (picture card) of the character is performed. The pre-reach advance notice effect is a notice effect in which the change of the mode progresses step by step from the first stage to a plurality of stages (for example, the second to fifth stages) according to a predetermined order. The design image used in this pre-reach notice production is positioned in front of the production design that is variably displayed on the screen, and is displayed, for example, so that it appears from the left edge of the screen. But it's okay.). It should be noted that the "preliminary notice before reach occurrence" here means that the possibility of reach or the possibility of a big hit is given before any effect symbol is stopped and displayed. By executing such “pre-reach notice production”, it is possible to obtain the effect that the player has the expectation that “it may develop into reach=the possibility of a big hit increases”.

[Preliminary notice production before reach (second stage)]
In FIG. 40(C): after the form of the first stage of the pre-reach notice announcement effect is executed, the change of the form of the pre-reach notice advance effect proceeds to the second stage. Here, as a notice effect before the second stage reach occurrence, an effect using a picture image of a character different from the previous one is performed. Specifically, another pattern image additionally appears from the right end of the screen and is displayed so as to overlap the front of the previously displayed pattern image. Further, the size of the picture image displayed at this time is larger than that of the picture image previously displayed. Then, the production by the sound output, in which the character expressed by the picture image utters a dialogue (for example, "I will reach," etc.), is also performed.

The pre-reach advance notice effect (second stage) using such a second picture image is a step further than the pre-reach advance notice effect (first stage) performed in FIG. 40B. It is a development type. In this way, the “pre-reach notice announcement effect” that develops in this way is generally referred to as “step-up notice” or the like. Here, an example is shown in which the second-stage design image appears in the pre-reach notice production, but in the production mode in which the third-, fourth-, and fifth-stage design images appear and appear one after another. It may be. Further, for example, the size may be enlarged each time the pattern images of the third stage, the fourth stage, and the fifth stage appear and are displayed one after another. Even at this stage, the variable display of effect symbols is continued. In any case, by advancing the change in the form of the pre-reach advance notice production to more stages, it is possible to suggest to the player that there is a high possibility (a high degree of expectation) of a big hit in this change. (For example, suggesting the maximum degree of expectation when progressing to the fifth stage.)

[Stop of left production design]
In FIG. 40 (D): the middle of the variation display effect is approaching, and the variation display of the left effect design is stopped in due course. At this point, the effect symbol representing the number "5" is stopped at the left side position of the screen.

[Generation of reach state]
In FIG. 40 (E): Then, following the left effect design, for example, the variable display of the right effect design is stopped. At this time, the reach state of "5"-"changing"-"5" has occurred because the effect symbol representing the number "5" is stopped at the right side position of the screen. Then, on the screen, an image that emphasizes one line in the reach state is also displayed. In addition, an effect of outputting a voice such as “Reach!” is also performed.

After the reach state occurs, the reach effect at the time of winning is executed (however, at this point, the result of winning has not been expressed yet.). In the reach effect, only the effect symbol corresponding to the ten-tempered number (here, “5”) is displayed on the screen, and the other symbols are not displayed. At this time, the effect design may be displayed in a reduced state at each of the four corners of the screen.

[Advance notice after reach (first time)]
In FIG. 40 (F): When a reach state occurs for a while, for example, an image representing the figure of “heart” forms a group and passes diagonally on the screen, and a notice effect (first time) after the reach is generated. .. In this case, the image of the “heart group” is suddenly displayed on the screen as if flowing, so that it is possible to enhance the visual appeal to the player. By executing the notice production after the visually noticeable reach notice is generated, it is possible to obtain the effect of making the player have a greater sense of expectation.

[Progress of reach production]
In FIG. 40(G): Following the notice effect after the first reach occurrence, for example, images representing the numbers “2” to “6” are displayed in a state of forming a three-dimensional column on the screen, and The effect that the numerical images are erased from the screen in the order of "2", "3", "4"... Such an effect is also performed for the purpose of suggesting (indicating) to the player that the number "5" is a "big hit" when it is left without being erased until the end, or reminding the player. Also, it means that if the number "4" is erased and "5" remains in front of the screen, it is a "big hit", and if the number "5" is also erased, it is "out." In the case of the deviation, for example, the number "6" is displayed on the screen after the number "5" is erased. Therefore, during this period, as the images are erased in order of the numbers "2", "3", "4", the player's sense of tension and expectation also increase. Then, if the number "4" is actually erased on the screen and the production progresses with the number "5" remaining on the screen, the possibility of a "big hit" increases, so there is a sense of tension in the player. Also suddenly increases.

[Advance notice after reach (second time)]
In FIG. 40 (H): When the reach production is approaching the final stage, the image of the character suddenly appears on the screen as if it is split into a large copy, and the character utters some dialogue (or, silently). A notice effect (second time) will be given after the occurrence of the reach (smiley is acceptable). At this point, for example, the content of the reach effect is a development that "if the number "5" remains without being erased, the possibility of a big hit of "5"-"5"-"5" is increased. Therefore, by causing a large image of the character to appear at this timing, it is possible to obtain the effect of making the player have an expectation that "it may be a big hit".

As another reach effect different from the above, there is a development that, for example, "the numbers "2" to "4" are erased, and if the number "5" is left without being erased at the end, it is a big hit". When the image of the character appears at such a timing, it is possible to obtain the effect of making the player have an expectation that "a big hit may be near".

[Stop display effect]
In FIG. 40(I): And the last medium effect design is stopped. In this example, it is possible to convey to the player that it is a big hit by stopping and displaying the effect symbol representing "5" in the center of the screen.

In FIG. 40 (J): And, for example, substantially in synchronization with the stop display of the first special symbol, the stop display effect as the effect symbol is performed. The stop display effect of the effect symbol is performed, for example, in a state where the left, middle, and right effect symbols are respectively restored to the initial sizes. By performing such a stop display effect, it is possible to teach the player that the final winning type has been finalized in the effect. To put it the other way around, it is possible to make it undisclosed to the player which winning symbol has been won by performing an unclear stop display effect on the effect.

If the result of the internal lottery is a non-winning result, the first special symbol, which is the subject of change this time, is stopped and displayed in the off symbol, so that the effect symbol is also similarly stopped and displayed. In this case, by displaying numbers "4" and "6" other than "5" in the center of the screen, unfortunately, an effect is given to notify that the change has not been a big hit. It should be noted that such an effect is executed as an "outside reach effect".

[Demonstration example]
FIG. 41 is a diagram showing an example of the demonstration effect.

Here, the "demo effect" refers to a situation where the game of the pachinko machine 1 is not in full operation, such as when the game is not being played on the pachinko machine 1 or when the game is temporarily interrupted. It is a performance that is executed. Specifically, the demonstration effect is when the pachinko machine 1 is in the so-called customer waiting state (the first and second special symbol working memory numbers are 0) or when the player hands the handle unit 16 during the game. It is executed when a predetermined time (for example, 1 minute) elapses in the separated state (the number of the first and second special symbol operation memories is also 0).

As shown in FIG. 41, during the performance of the demonstration, for example, four characters of a clover, a heart, a spade, and a diamond on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 stand in the shade of trees in the park and have a smiling expression. A video composed of an image or the like showing the situation is reproduced. The logo lamp 45 is lit in a normal display color (for example, white).

[Demonstration example of setting suggestion production that appears during demonstration production]
42 to 44 are diagrams showing some effect examples of setting suggestion effects that appear during the execution of the demonstration effects. Hereinafter, description will be made step by step.

42(A): On the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, an image similar to the demonstration effect in the normal state is reproduced. On the other hand, the logo lamp 45 is lit in blue. The blue lighting of the logo lamp 45 indicates that the setting has been changed on the day (setting change suggestion).

42(B): On the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, in addition to the reproduction of the image similar to the demonstration effect in the normal time, from the image showing the worker who wears a towel headband on the upper right part of the screen. “Setting change icon BC” is displayed. The setting change icon BC also indicates that the setting has been changed on the day (setting change suggestion). In this way, the logo lamp 45 is lit in blue and the setting change icon BC has a common suggesting content, but whether or not each setting suggesting element appears is determined by a production lottery performed in consideration of various situations. Since it is determined, either one of them may appear alone or both may appear at the same time. In FIG. 42B, the setting change icon BC appears by itself, and the logo lamp 45 is lit in the normal display color.

In FIG. 43(C): on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, in addition to the video reproduction similar to the demonstration effect in the normal time, the setting change icon BC is displayed in the upper right part of the screen, and the right side of it is displayed. , "SUPER/HERO" has an upper plate on which a "high setting icon BH" consisting of an image decorated with a crown and two axes is displayed. The high setting icon BH indicates that the highest setting (setting 6) has been used within the last 10 days including the current day (setting result suggestion). On the other hand, the logo lamp 45 is lit in the normal display color. The display of the high setting icon BH may indicate that the high setting (for example, setting 5 or higher) is used instead of the highest setting (setting 6).

43(D): On the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, in addition to the video reproduction similar to the demonstration effect in the normal time, the high setting icon BH is displayed in the upper right part of the screen and the logo lamp 45 is red. Is lit up with. The lighting of the logo lamp 45 in red indicates that the high setting (setting 4 or higher) has been used within the last 10 days including the current day (setting result suggestion).

In FIG. 44(E): on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, in addition to the video reproduction similar to the demonstration effect in the normal time, the setting change icon BC and the high setting icon BH are arranged side by side in the upper right part of the screen. The logo lamp 45 is displayed in red and lights up in red. In this way, depending on the result of the effect lottery, the setting change icon BC, the high setting icon BH, and the logo lamp 45 may be simultaneously turned on in an abnormal color.

44(F): On the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, an image similar to the demonstration effect in the normal state is reproduced. On the other hand, the logo lamp 45 is lit in a rainbow color. Illumination of the logo lamp 45 in the rainbow color indicates that it is the highest setting (setting 6) on the day (current setting suggestion). It should be noted that by lighting the logo lamp 45 in rainbow colors, it may be suggested that the high setting (for example, setting 5 or higher) is used instead of the highest setting (setting 6).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the logo lamp 45 is turned on in a display color (blue, red, rainbow) different from the normal color, and the setting change icon BC and the high setting icon BH are displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. Thus, the setting suggestion effect is executed. It is not disclosed to the player what each setting suggestive element specifically suggests, but it is understood that the appearance of these setting suggestive elements has some meaning over the course of the number of games. Can be noticed by the person. Also, it is possible to make the player intuitively think that the lighting of the logo lamp 45 in red or iridescent is a very advantageous base for the player from the display color.

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the game is motivated to select a table to be played on the day after comparing many tables (pachinko machine 1) while inferring the content suggested by each setting suggestion element. As a result, it is possible to increase the number of customers in a time zone with a small number of customers (for example, the first in the morning) and improve the operation rate of the pachinko machine 1. Also, if some setting suggestive element has already appeared in the pachinko machine 1 that is playing the game, it will take a little longer until a change occurs in its configuration (for example, a change in the lighting color of the logo lamp or the appearance of a further setting suggestive element). It is possible to give the player the motivation to play the game tenaciously, and it is possible for the player to continue for a long time.

It should be noted that the above-mentioned example of the setting suggestion effect is merely given as an example, and the setting suggestion element may appear in a combination other than these. Further, a specific control method of the setting suggestion effect, contents to be added in the effect lottery, etc. will be described later in detail with reference to another drawing.

[Demonstration example of production during major role when corresponding to "12 round normal pattern" etc.]
45 to 48 are continuous diagrams partially showing an example of the effect during the major role in the case of corresponding to the "12 round normal symbol" or the "12 round probability variation symbol 2".

In the present embodiment, when the "12 round regular pattern" is applied, an effect in which the ally character is defeated by the enemy character is executed in the active role effect, and when the "12 round probability variation pattern 2" is applied, The production in which the ally character wins over the enemy character is executed. The flow of the production will be described below step by step.

[First round]
In FIG. 45 (A): When the first round of the big hit game is started, for example, character information corresponding to the number of rounds of "ROUND1" is displayed on the screen, and the battle effect in the big role is started. In the example shown in the figure, a haunted image of an umbrella, which is an enemy character, is displayed on the left side of the screen, an image of a female character, who is an ally character is displayed on the right side of the screen, and an image of the character "VS" is displayed in the center of the screen. Is displayed. Thereby, it is possible to teach the player that the battle effect will be started.

Further, in the lower right corner position of the screen, the effect symbol (here, the effect symbol "5") corresponding to the winning symbol of this time is displayed. In this way, by continuously displaying the winning symbol (so-called "leftover eye") even during the big hit game, it is possible to continuously instruct the player of the information that "the winning symbol is 5".

[Second round]
In FIG. 45(B): When the second round of the big hit game is started, the battle effect in the big role specifically progresses. In the example shown in the figure, a haunted umbrella moves from the left side to the right side. Then, the female character is surprised by the ghost of the umbrella and escapes, and then disappears to the right side of the screen.

[3rd round]
In FIG. 45(C): When the third round of the big hit game is started, the battle effect during the big role specifically progresses. In the illustrated example, a female character takes out a fan (weapon), and a flame (aura) appears from the fan.

[4th round]
In FIG. 45(D): And in the fourth round of the big hit game, a ghost of an umbrella throws out a special move that sticks out a long tongue from the mouth, and a female character greets the special move with a fan. If the ghost of the umbrella wins in this state, it means that you have been a big hit with "12 round regular pattern", and if the female character wins, you have a big hit with "12 round probability variation pattern 2". ing.

[5th round (at the time of 12th round normal pattern winning)]
In FIG. 46(E): In the case of winning in the “12 round regular symbol”, the defeat effect is executed in the 5th round. Specifically, with the characters "defeat...", the ghost of the umbrella is displayed in a large size, and the female character is displayed in a small size (allied character defeat production).

[6th round (when 12th round regular pattern is won)]
In FIG. 46 (F): In the case of winning in the “12th round normal symbol”, the re-challenge promotion effect is executed in the 6th round. Specifically, the production in which the female character utters a line such as "I will not lose next!" is executed. As a result, the player can be motivated to aim for a big hit again. In the seventh to twelfth rounds of the big hit game, the re-challenge promotion effect similar to that in the sixth round is executed.

In the sixth round when the "12 round normal symbol" is won, the second variable winning device 31 is opened, but since the opening time is set extremely short, the game ball must pass through the probability variation area. There is no.

[At the end of a major role]
In FIG. 46 (G): At the timing (the ending process) when the big hit game in “12 round normal symbol” ends, a big character end effect of the content that teaches the internal state to be transferred after this is executed. In the example shown in the figure, the character information “Coastal mode entry!” is displayed on the screen. By executing such a big role end effect, it is possible to teach the player to shift to the coast mode of the "low probability time reduction state" as a privilege after the big hit game is finished.

[5th round (12th round probability variation pattern winning 2)]
In FIG. 47 (H): On the other hand, in the case of winning in “12 round probability variation pattern 2”, the winning effect is executed in the fifth round. Specifically, the female character is displayed in a large size and the ghost of the umbrella is displayed in a small size together with the word "victory!!" (Friend character winning effect).

[6th round (12th round probability variation pattern winning 2)]
In FIG. 47 (I): In the case of winning in “12 round probability variation pattern 2”, the fireworks rush challenge effect is executed in the sixth round. If you succeed in this challenge production, you will enter the fireworks rush, which is a "high probability time reduction state". Specifically, a production in which a hermit character utters a line such as “Aim for V attacker!” is executed. As a result, it is possible to convey the playability such as aiming at the second variable winning device 31 to the player. Further, in the sixth round when the "12 round probability variation pattern 2" is won, the second variable winning a prize device 31 is opened for a long time, so that the same profit as in the previous rounds can be obtained. Further, in the sixth round when the "12 round probability variation pattern 2" is won, since the probability variation area solenoid 99 operates to open the probability variation area for a long time, a game ball enters the second variable winning device 31. The game ball is guided by the probability variation area vane member 31d and passes through the probability variation area.

In FIG. 47(J), when the player continues to hit the right side and the game ball enters the second variable winning device 31 and passes through the probability variation area, the panda character holds the V mark for blessing. Is executed. In the seventh to twelfth rounds of the big hit game, the same blessing effect as in the sixth round is executed.

[At the end of a major role]
In FIG. 47 (K): At the timing when the big hit game ends (during the end process), a big role end effect of the content that teaches the internal state to be transferred after this is executed. In the example shown in the figure, the text information “Fireworks rush rush!” is displayed on the screen. By executing such a big role end effect, the player can be instructed to shift to the “high probability time shortened state” fireworks rush as a privilege after the big hit game ends.

The above is an example of production when the game ball passes through the probability variation area safely, corresponding to "12 round probability variation pattern 2", but the game ball is a probability variation area even if "12 round probability variation pattern 2" is applicable. If it does not pass through, the following example of performance is obtained.

[5th round (12th round probability variation pattern winning 2)]
In FIG. 48 (L): In the case of winning in “12 round probability variation pattern 2”, winning effect is executed in the fifth round. Specifically, the female character is displayed in a large size and the ghost of the umbrella is displayed in a small size together with the word "victory!!" (Friend character winning effect).

[6th round (12th round probability variation pattern winning 2)]
In FIG. 48 (M): In the case of winning in “12 round probability variation pattern 2”, the fireworks rush challenge effect is executed in the sixth round. If you succeed in this challenge production, you will enter the fireworks rush, which is a "high probability time reduction state". Specifically, a production in which a hermit character utters a line such as “Aim for V attacker!” is executed. As a result, it is possible to convey the playability such as aiming at the second variable winning device 31 to the player. Further, in the sixth round when the "12 round probability variation pattern 2" is won, the second variable winning a prize device 31 is opened for a long time, so that the same profit as in the previous rounds can be obtained. Further, in the sixth round when the "12 round probability variation pattern 2" is won, the probability variation area solenoid 99 operates so as to open the probability variation area for a long time, so when a game ball enters the second variable winning device 31, The game ball is guided by the probability variation area vane member 31d and passes through the probability variation area.

However, here, for some reason (for example, not hitting to the right, ball clogging), it is assumed that no game ball has entered the second variable winning device 31 by the end of the sixth round. In this case, the game ball does not pass through the probability variation area.

In FIG. 48 (N): In this case, a failure effect in which the panda character utters the line "sorry" is executed. In the seventh to twelfth rounds of the big hit game, the failure effect is continued.

[At the end of a major role]
In FIG. 48 (O): At the timing when the big hit game with “12 round probability variation pattern 2” ends (during ending processing), a big role end effect of the content that teaches the internal state to be transferred after this is executed. In the example shown in the figure, the character information “Coastal mode entry!” is displayed on the screen. By executing such a big role end effect, it is possible to teach the player to shift to the coast mode of the "low probability time reduction state" as a privilege after the big hit game is finished.

Here, the example of the effect when the "12 round probability variation pattern 1" is applied is not particularly shown, but the battle effect is executed and the victory effect is executed in the same manner as when the "12 round probability variation pattern 2" is applied. Alternatively, an effect other than the battle effect may be executed. When the "12th round probability variation pattern 2" is applied, the second variable winning device 31 is opened long in the sixth round, so when the game ball passes through the probability variation area, it rushes into the firework rush. In addition, in "12 round probability variation pattern 2", it is possible to obtain substantially four rounds.

[Example of a fireworks rush]
FIG. 49 is a continuous view showing an example of the effect of a firework rush. This fireworks rush is a mode in which the player wins "any probability variation pattern other than the 12-round normal symbol" and is transferred after the big hit game when the game ball passes through the probability variation area during the big hit game. The firework rush is in a high probability time reduction state. The flow of the production will be described below step by step.

In FIG. 49 (A): For example, the variation display of the effect symbol is performed in the state of “fireworks rush” by performing the variation display for the first time after the end of the big hit game. The background image of the firework rush is a background image that expresses "a scene where a fireworks is launched in the night sky" and "a female character is watching the fireworks" in order to give the player a deep impression of the fireworks motif. Has become. Further, the fourth symbol Z2 is variably displayed in the upper right portion of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42.

In FIG. 49 (B): And after the jackpot game is over, the first variation (at the time of non-winning) is over, so that all the effect symbols are stopped and displayed (“3”-“1”-“7”). )). Further, the fourth symbol Z2 is stopped and displayed in a non-winning mode (for example, white display color).

In FIG. 49(C): When the next variation starts, the variation display for the second time after the end of the big hit game is displayed. In the fireworks rush (high probability time shortened state), since the variable start winning device 28 is operated at a high frequency, as long as the player continues to right-hand, the effect symbol accompanying the variable display of the second special symbol The variable display is often displayed. Also, when the result of the winning is obtained in the fireworks rush, the reach effect is executed and the jackpot is a big hit.

In the firework rush, similarly to the normal mode, the pre-change display area X1 or the changing display area X2 may be displayed, and the marker M1 or the marker M2 may be displayed. This also applies to the following coastal modes.

[Direction during a major role (normal bonus effect)]
FIG. 50 is a continuous view partially showing an example of a big role effect during the big hit game in the case where the "6 round probability variation pattern 1" or the "6 round probability variation pattern 2" is applied.

[1 round]
In FIG. 50(A): When the first round of the big hit game is started, a big win production effect having contents corresponding to the progress status of the game of "big hit" is executed. In the large-effect display, for example, character information corresponding to the number of rounds of "ROUND1" is displayed on the screen. Further, in the lower right corner position of the screen, the effect symbol (here, the effect symbol 2) corresponding to the winning symbol this time is displayed. In this way, by continuously displaying the winning symbol (so-called "leftover eye") during the big hit game, it is possible to continuously instruct the player of the information "winning with the effect symbol of 2". In addition, the characters "normal bonus" are displayed in the lower area of the display screen, and images related to festivals such as fans and drums are displayed around the screen.

[6 rounds]
In FIG. 50(B): in the case of winning in “6 round probability variation pattern 1” or “6 round probability variation pattern 2”, the firework rush challenge effect is executed in the sixth round. If you succeed in this challenge production, you will enter the fireworks rush, which is in a high probability time reduction state. Specifically, a production in which a female character utters a line such as "Aim at V attacker" is executed. As a result, it is possible to convey the playability such as aiming at the second variable winning device 31 to the player. In addition, in the sixth round when the "6 round probability variation pattern 1" or "6 round probability variation pattern 2" is won, the second variable winning a prize device 31 is opened for a long time. Is obtained. Furthermore, in the sixth round when "6 round probability variation pattern 1" or "6 round probability variation pattern 2" is won, the probability variation region solenoid 99 operates to open the probability variation region for a long time, so the second variable winning device 31 When the game ball enters, the game ball is guided by the probability variation area vane member 31d and passes through the probability variation area.

In FIG. 50(C): Then, when the player continues to hit right, the game ball enters the second variable winning device 31 and passes through the probability variation area, and a V mark is displayed in the upper right of the display screen. The blessing production is executed.

[At the end of a major role]
In FIG. 50 (D): at the timing when the big hit game ends, a big role end effect of the content that teaches the internal state to be transferred after this is executed. In the example shown in the figure, the text information “Fireworks rush rush!” is displayed on the screen. By executing such a big role end effect, the player can be instructed to shift to the “high probability time shortened state” fireworks rush as a privilege after the big hit game ends.

[Director during a major role (special bonus effect)]
FIG. 51 is a continuous diagram that partially shows an example of a big role effect that is executed during the big hit game in the case of being in the “16 round probability variation pattern”.

[1 round]
In FIG. 51(A): When the first round of the big hit game is started, a big win production effect having contents corresponding to the progress status of the game of "big hit" is executed. In the large-effect display, for example, character information corresponding to the number of rounds of "ROUND1" is displayed on the screen. Further, at the lower right corner position of the screen, the effect design (here, the effect design of 7) corresponding to the winning design of this time is displayed. In this way, by continuously displaying the winning symbol (so-called "leftover eye") even during the big hit game, it is possible to continuously instruct the player of the information that "the winning symbol is 7". In the lower area of the display screen, the characters "Special Bonus" are displayed, and the image of a female character straddling a horse and performing a peace sign is displayed around the screen.

[6 rounds]
In FIG. 51(B): In the case of winning in the “16th round probability variation pattern”, the firework rush challenge effect is executed in the sixth round. If you succeed in this challenge production, you will enter the fireworks rush, which is in a high probability time reduction state. Specifically, a production in which a hermit character utters a line such as “Aim for V attacker!” is executed. As a result, it is possible to convey the playability such as aiming at the second variable winning device 31 to the player. Further, in the sixth round when the "16th round odd variation pattern" is won, the second variable winning device 31 is opened for a long time, so that the same profits as in the previous rounds can be obtained. Furthermore, in the sixth round when the 16-round probability variation pattern is won, the probability variation area solenoid 99 operates so as to open the probability variation area for a long time, so when the game ball enters the second variable winning device 31, the game ball is It passes through the probability variation region while being guided by the probability variation region vane member 31d.

In FIG. 51(C): Then, when the player continues to hit the right side and the game ball enters the second variable winning device 31 and passes through the probability variation area, a V mark is displayed next to the jumped-up female character. The displayed blessing effect is executed.

[16 rounds]
In FIG. 51 (D): After that, when the big hit game progresses smoothly and shifts to the final 16 rounds, the character information corresponding to the number of rounds of "ROUND16" is displayed on the screen and the big hit game is in progress. An effect image peculiar to is displayed. Further, in the lower right corner position of the screen, the effect symbol (effect symbol 7) as the "left eye" is continuously displayed.

[At the end of a major role]
In FIG. 51 (E): at the timing when the big hit game ends, a big role end effect of the content that teaches the internal state to be transferred after this is executed. In the example shown in the figure, the text information “Fireworks rush rush!” is displayed on the screen. By executing such a big role end effect, the player can be instructed to shift to the “high probability time shortened state” fireworks rush as a privilege after the big hit game ends.

[Example of production in coastal mode]
FIG. 52 is a continuous view showing an example of performance in the coast mode. This coast mode, after the jackpot game in the case of corresponding to the "12 round normal symbol", or when the game ball does not pass the probability variation area during the jackpot game, although it corresponds to any of the probability variation symbols, the jackpot game It is a mode to be transferred after the end of. The coast mode is a "low probability time reduction state". The flow of the production will be described below step by step.

In FIG. 52 (A): For example, after the big hit game in “12 round normal symbol” is finished, the first variation display is performed, so that the variation display of the effect symbol is performed in the “coast mode” state. There is. The background image in the coast mode is a background image with images such as “sand beach”, “sea”, and “mountain” as a motif in order to express the impression of healing which is the concept of the coast mode. Further, the fourth symbol Z2 is variably displayed on the upper right of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42.

In FIG. 52(B): Then, all the effect symbols are stopped and displayed ("1"-"1"-"5") due to the end of this variation (at the time of non-winning). Further, the fourth symbol Z2 is stopped and displayed in a non-winning mode (for example, white display color).

52(C): Then, the next fluctuation is started. This coast mode ends when the special symbol changes 100 times without obtaining a winning result. When the coast mode ends, the mode shifts to the normal mode with a low probability non-time reduction state. In addition, when the result of the winning is obtained in the coast mode, the reach effect is executed and a big hit occurs.

Next, an example of a control method for specifically realizing the above effects will be described. The variable display effect, the reach effect, the notice effect, the memory display effect, the active role effect, and the like described above are all controlled through the following control processing executed by the effect control device 124.

[Production control processing]
As described above, the effect control device 124 has a function as an effect control processor and a function as an effect reproduction processor, and realizes these two functions by allocating different resources of the effect control CPU 126 to each. .. The effect control CPU 126 as the effect control processor receives the effect command transmitted from the main control device 70, and sets various control tables for instructing the reproduction of the effect according to the contents. Further, the effect control CPU 126 as an effect reproduction processor analyzes the control table set by the effect control processor and gives a more specific instruction to each device based on the contents thereof, thereby causing the operation of each device (the liquid crystal display). Screen display by the device 42, audio output by the speakers 54, 55, 56, 58, light emission by the various lamps 46 to 52 and the panel lamp 53, displacement of various movable bodies by the movable body motor 57, and the like, and the pachinko machine 1 Realize the performance reproduction in.

Therefore, for convenience of description, in the following description, the subject of operation when the effect control CPU 126 functions as the effect control processor is expressed as “effect control unit 210”, and the effect control CPU 126 functions as the effect display processor. The operation subject in this case will be appropriately expressed as "display control unit 220", "voice control unit 222", "lamp control unit 224", or "motor control unit 226" depending on the content.

FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of effect control processing executed by the effect control CPU 126. This effect control process is executed in a timer interrupt process (interrupt management process) separately from, for example, a reset start (main) process (not shown). The production control CPU 126 generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined interrupt cycle (for example, several tens of μs to several ms cycle) during execution of the reset start process, and executes the timer interrupt process.

Production control processing, command reception processing (step S400), operation memory production management processing (step S401), production design management processing (step S402), display output processing (step S404), input control processing (step S405), lamp drive. This is a configuration including a subroutine group of a process (step S406), a sound drive process (step S408), an effect random number update process (step S410), and other processes (step S412). Hereinafter, a basic flow of the effect control process will be described along with each process.

Step S400: In the command receiving process, the effect control unit 210 receives the effect command transmitted from the main control CPU72. Further, the effect control unit 210 analyzes the received effect commands and stores them in the command buffer area of the RAM 130 by type. In addition, the effect command transmitted from the main control CPU72, for example, special figure destination determination effect command, (special symbol) working memory number increase effect command, (special symbol) operating memory number decrease effect command, start mouth winning sound Control command, command for demonstration effect, lottery result command, fluctuation pattern command, fluctuation start command, stop pattern command, confirmation command, state designation command, round number command, error notification command, jackpot end effect command, number cut counter value command, There are a variation pattern destination determination command, a stop display time end command, a probability variation area passing command, a prize ball content command, a setting related end designation command, and the like.

Step S401: In the operation memory effect management process, the effect control unit 210 controls the execution of the memory display effect and the pre-reading notice effect using the markers M1 and M2. The contents of the operation memory effect management process will be described later with reference to another drawing.

Step S402: In the effect symbol management process, the effect control unit 210 controls the content of the variable display effect and the stop display effect using the effect symbol, and during the opening/closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31. Controls the contents of the production (production execution means). Further, in this process, the effect control unit 210 selects an effect pattern of various notice effects (pre-reach notice effect, post-reach notice effect, etc.). The contents of the effect symbol management process will be described later with reference to another drawing.

Step S404: In the display output process, the effect control unit 210 first causes the display control unit 220 to generate effect contents (for example, the number of operation memories for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the operation memory effect pattern number, the prefetch notice). A message and a control table for instructing the effect pattern number, the variable effect pattern number, the change notice effect number, the background pattern number, the hold deletion, etc.) are set. In response to this, the display control unit 220 gives a specific drawing instruction to the VDP 152 based on the set message and the contents of the control table, and controls the display operation by the liquid crystal display 42.

Step S405: In the input control process, first, the effect control unit 210 synchronizes with the scene in which the operation is requested by the player with the progress of the effect, and the operation member such as the operation unit 60 is input to the input control unit 228 by the player. The detection of whether or not the operation is performed in the designated mode is instructed. More specifically, the effect control unit 210 sets one of the input control tables defined in advance in the control ROM 180. In response to this, the input control unit 228 analyzes the contents of the set input control table, and based on this, sets the period during which the operation of any one of the operation members can be accepted. Further, it is detected whether or not an operation (operation required by the player) that matches the mode designated by the effect control unit 210 is performed, and the detection result is output and returned to the effect control unit 210.

Step S406: In the lamp driving process, the effect control unit 210 first sets a control table for instructing the lamp control unit 224 about the effect contents. In response to this, the lamp control unit 224 relays the LED driver 198 based on the contents of the set control table and outputs a specific drive signal to the driver IC 132, and various lamps 46 to 52, the panel lamp 53, and the like. A light source or the like built in each part of the operation unit 60 is driven (lighted or extinguished, blinking, brightness gradation change, etc.).

Step S408: In the sound driving process, first, the effect control unit 210 sets a control table for instructing the sound control unit 222 on the effect content. In response to this, the voice control unit 222 gives a specific output content instruction to the voice IC 134 based on the content of the set control table, and causes the speakers 54, 55, 56, and 58 to output sounds according to the effect content ( Output sound effects, BGM, etc.).

Step S410: In the effect random number updating process, the effect control unit 210 updates various effect random numbers in the counter area of the RAM 130. The effect random numbers include, for example, random numbers used for advance notice selection and random numbers used for normal background change lottery (effect lottery).

Step S412: In other processing, for example, the effect control unit 210 first sets a control table for instructing the motor control unit 226 on the effect contents. In response to this, the motor control unit 226 gives a specific control content instruction to the SMC 199 based on the content of the set control table. Further, the SMC 199 creates an operation pattern of the movable body 40f based on an instruction from the motor control unit 226, outputs a control signal corresponding to the operation pattern to the driver IC, and drives the movable body 40f. The movable body 40f operates with the movable body motor 57 as a drive source, and produces an effect in synchronization with the display of an image on the liquid crystal display 42 or independently.

Through the above-described production control processing, the production control unit 210 can comprehensively control the production contents in the pachinko machine 1. Next, the contents of the working memory effect management process executed in the effect control process will be described.

[Working memory performance management process]
FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the operation memory effect management process.
The operation memory effect management processing is the first special symbol and the second special symbol which are displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 in conjunction with the increase/decrease in the number of lottery elements (operation memory number) stored in the main control device 70. Is a process of updating the display of the markers M1 and M2 corresponding to (display effect execution means), and is called and executed in the process of the effect control process (step S401 in FIG. 53). Hereinafter, description will be given along with an example of the procedure.

Step S700: First, the effect control unit 210 confirms whether or not the effect command for increasing the number of working memories is received from the main control CPU72. Specifically, the production control unit 210 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the production command for increasing the number of working memories is stored. When it is confirmed that the effect command for increasing the number of working memories is stored (step S700: Yes), the effect control unit 210 executes step S702. In addition, when it is not possible to confirm that the effect command for increasing the number of operation memories is stored (step S700: No), the effect control unit 210 does not execute step S702.

Step S702: The effect control unit 210 executes the effect memory number increase effect selection process. In this process, the effect control unit 210 selects an effect for displaying the markers M1 and M2 corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

Step S704: The production control unit 210 confirms whether or not the production memory time reduction production command is received from the main control CPU72. Specifically, the production control unit 210 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the production command when the number of working memories is reduced is stored. When it is confirmed that the effect command for decreasing the number of working memories is stored (step S704: Yes), the effect control unit 210 executes step S706. In addition, when it is not possible to confirm that the effect command for decreasing the number of operation memories is stored (step S704: No), the effect control unit 210 does not execute step S706.

Step S706: The effect control unit 210 executes the effect memory number decrease effect effect selection process. In this process, the production control unit 210 slides the markers M1 and M2 corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol to slide the markers corresponding to the lottery elements consumed by the internal lottery from the pre-variation display area X1. An effect to be moved to the middle display area X2 is selected. The memory marker moved to the changing display area X2 selects an effect to be erased at the end of the change.
When the above procedure is finished, the effect control unit 210 returns to the effect control process (FIG. 53).

[Production symbol management processing]
FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the effect symbol management process. Production symbol management process, execution selection process (step S500), production symbol variation pre-process (step S502), production symbol variation process (step S504), production symbol stop display process (step S506) and variable winning device operation time This is a configuration including a subroutine group of the process (step S508). Hereinafter, the basic flow of the effect symbol management process will be described along with each process.

Step S500: In the execution selection process, the effect control unit 210 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (one of steps S502 to S508). For example, the production control unit 210 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the production symbol management processing in the “jump table” as the return destination address. Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the process performed so far. For example, in the situation where the variable display effect has not been started yet, the effect control unit 210 selects the effect symbol change preprocessing (step S502) as the next jump destination. On the other hand, if the production symbol variation pre-process has already been completed, the production control unit 210 selects the production symbol changing process (step S504) as the next jump destination, and if the production symbol changing process is completed, As the next jump destination, the effect symbol stop displaying process (step S506) is selected. In addition, the variable winning device operating process (step S508) is performed when the main control CPU 72 selects the big winning variable winning device managing process (step S5000 in FIG. 17) or the small winning variable winning device managing process (FIG. 17). When step S6000) is selected, the jump destination is selected. In this case, steps S502 to S506 are not executed.

Step S502: In the production symbol variation pre-processing, the production control unit 210 performs an operation of adjusting the conditions for starting the variable display production using the production symbol. In addition, in this process, the effect control unit 210 selects the content of the reach effect according to various conditions (lottery result, winning type, variation pattern, etc.), and an effect pattern for the notice effect (other than the pre-read notice effect pattern). (Pre-reach notice pattern, post-reach notice pattern, etc.)). In addition, the effect control unit 210 also controls the demonstration effect when the pachinko machine 1 is in a so-called customer waiting state. The details of the specific processing will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

Step S504: In the effect symbol changing process, the effect control unit 210 generates control information for instructing the display control unit 220 as necessary. For example, when performing the effect using the operation unit 60 during execution of the variable display effect using the effect pattern, the input control unit 228 monitors whether or not the player operates the operation unit 60, and responds to the result. The display control unit 220 is instructed about control information of effect contents (operation trigger effect, continuous hit effect, linked operation effect, etc.).

Step S506: In the effect symbol stop displaying process, the effect control unit 210 controls the content of the stop display effect using the effect symbol and the moving image in a mode according to the result of the internal lottery. That is, the effect control unit 210 instructs the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) to end the variable display effect and execute the stop display effect. In response to this, the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) terminates the variable display effect that has been actually executed in the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42 and executes the stop display effect. Thereby, the stop display effect is executed substantially in synchronization with the stop display of the special symbol, and the result of the internal lottery can be directedly taught to the player (disclosure, notification, notification, etc.) (symbol effect execution) means). In addition, at the time of a small hit, the stop display effect can be executed in a manner similar to or similar to the loss.

Step S508: In the process at the time of operating the variable winning device, the effect control unit 210 controls the effect content during the small hit or the big hit (special game effect executing means). In this process, the effect control unit 210 selects the content of the effect during major effect in accordance with various conditions (e.g., winning type). For example, in the case of a 16-round big hit, the effect control unit 210 selects a 16-round large-effect-use effect pattern as effect contents to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 42, and instructs this to the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146). To do. As a result, the image of the major effect is displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and the content of the effect changes as the round progresses.

[Production pattern change preprocessing]
FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the effect design variation pre-processing. Hereinafter, description will be given along with an example of the procedure.

Step S600: The effect control unit 210 confirms whether or not the demonstration effect command is received from the main control CPU72. Specifically, the effect control unit 210 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether the demonstration effect command is stored. As a result, if it is confirmed that the demonstration effect command is stored (Yes), the effect control unit 210 executes step S602.

Step S602: The effect control unit 210 executes a demo selection process. In this process, the effect control unit 210 selects a demonstration effect pattern. Demonstration production pattern, under the situation that the game of the pachinko machine 1 is not in full operation (other than the case of the so-called customer waiting state where the first and second special symbol working memory numbers are 0, the first and second special symbols) The number of working memories is 0, and the contents of the effect executed when the game is temporarily interrupted due to the lapse of a predetermined time while the player's hand is away from the handle unit 16) are defined. .. In addition, you may add to the condition that the 1st and 2nd special symbols have not changed here (stop display).

Step S603: The effect control unit 210 executes a setting suggestion effect management process. In this process, the effect control unit 210 controls the execution of the setting suggestion effect during the execution of the demonstration effect. The specific content of the setting suggestion effect management processing will be described later in detail with reference to the following flowchart.

When the above procedure is finished, the effect control unit 210 returns to the end address of the effect symbol management process. Then, the effect control unit 210 directly returns to the effect control process, and in the subsequent display output process (step S404 in FIG. 53) and lamp drive process (step S406 in FIG. 53), the contents of the demonstration effect are displayed based on the demonstration effect pattern. Control.

On the other hand, if it is confirmed in step S600 that the demonstration effect command is not stored (No), the effect control unit 210 next executes step S604.

Step S604: The production control unit 210 confirms whether or not the variation this time is out (non-winning). Specifically, the production control unit 210 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is stored. As a result, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is saved (Yes), the effect control unit 210 executes step S612. On the contrary, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is not stored (No), the effect control unit 210 executes step S606. It should be noted that the confirmation of whether or not the current variation is not possible can be performed based on the variation pattern command or the stop symbol command in addition to the lottery result command. That is, if the variation pattern command of this time corresponds to the out-of-order normal variation or the out-of-bounds reach variation, it can be determined that the current variation is out of order. Alternatively, if the current stop symbol command specifies a non-winning symbol, it can be determined that the current variation is out of alignment.

Step S606: If the lottery result command is other than non-winning (missing) (step S604: No), then the effect control unit 210 confirms whether or not the current change is a big hit. Specifically, the effect control unit 210 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the lottery result command at the time of a big hit is stored. As a result, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of the big hit is stored (Yes), the effect control unit 210 executes step S610. On the contrary, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of the big hit is not saved (No), the only remaining lottery result command at the time of the small hit is, so in this case, the effect control unit 210 executes step S608. .. In addition, it is also possible to confirm whether or not the variation this time is a big hit, based on a variation pattern command or a stop symbol command. That is, if the variation pattern command of this time corresponds to a big hit variation, it can be determined that the present variation is a big hit. Further, if the current stop symbol command corresponds to the big hit symbol, it can be determined that the current fluctuation is the big hit.

Step S608: The effect control unit 210 executes a small hit time variation effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control unit 210 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern command (for example, “C0H00H” to “D0H7FH”) received from the main control CPU72. The effect pattern number is prepared in advance corresponding to the variation pattern command, and the effect control unit 210 refers to an effect pattern selection table (not shown) to select the effect pattern number corresponding to the variation pattern command at that time. You can In addition, the effect pattern number may be prepared in combination with the variation pattern command, or a plurality of effect pattern numbers may be provided for one variation pattern command.

Further, when the production pattern number is selected, the production control unit 210 refers to a production table (not shown), and the variation schedule of the production symbol corresponding to the variation production pattern number at that time (variation time or the type of reach and the reach occurrence timing), The mode of stop display is determined. The types of effect symbols determined here all correspond to “combination of symbols at the time of small hit”.

The above procedure corresponds to a case of "small hit", but when it corresponds to a big hit, the effect control unit 210 confirms that it is a "big hit" in step S606 (Yes). In this case, the production control unit 210 executes step S610.

Step S610: The effect control unit 210 executes a big hit time variation effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control unit 210 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern command (for example, “E0H00H” to “F0H7FH”) received from the main control CPU 72. In the big hit production effect pattern selection processing, the processing may be further branched for each big hit stop pattern.

In the case of non-winning, the following procedure is executed. That is, if the effect control unit 210 confirms that there is a deviation in step S604 (Yes), then it executes step S612.

Step S612: The effect control unit 210 executes the off-time variation effect pattern selection processing. In this process, the effect control unit 210 determines the effect pattern number at the time of deviation based on the variation pattern command (for example, "A0H00H" to "A6H7FH") received from the main control CPU72. The effect pattern numbers at the time of falling out are classified into "outside normal fluctuation", "time saving outlying fluctuation", "outside reach fluctuation", and the like, and a fine reach fluctuation pattern is defined in "outside reach fluctuation". Which effect pattern number the effect control unit 210 selects is determined by the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control CPU 72.

When the production pattern number at the time of departure is selected, the production control unit 210 refers to the production table (not shown), and the variation schedule of the production design corresponding to the variation production pattern number at that time (variation time, presence/absence of reach occurrence, reach occurrence) In this case, the reach type and reach generation timing) and the stop display mode (for example, “7”-“2”-“4”) are determined.

When the processing of any of the above steps S608, S610, and S612 is executed, the effect control unit 210 next executes step S614.

Step S614: The effect control unit 210 executes an announcement selection process (annotation effect execution means). In this process, the effect control unit 210 selects the content of the notice effect to be executed during the current variable display effect by lottery. The content of the notice production is determined based on, for example, the result of the internal lottery (winning or non-winning) and the current internal state (normal state, high probability state, time reduction state). The notice production is to give a notice to the player that a reach state may occur during the variable display production, or give a notice that there is a possibility of a big hit eventually. Therefore, the selection ratio of the notice effect is set low at the time of non-winning, but the selection ratio of the notice effect is set relatively high at the time of winning in order to increase the player's expectation.

When the above procedure is finished, the effect control unit 210 returns to the effect symbol management process (end address). Thereby, in the subsequent effect symbol variation process (step S504 in FIG. 55), the variation display effect and the stop display effect are executed based on the actually selected variation effect pattern (effect execution means), and various types. The notice production is executed based on the notice production pattern.

[Setting suggestion production management process]
FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the setting suggestion effect management process.
The setting suggestion effect management process is a process for controlling the execution of the setting suggestion effect during the execution of the demonstration effect (setting suggestion effect execution control means), and is called in the process of the effect design variation preprocessing (step S603 in FIG. 56). Is executed. Hereinafter, description will be given along with an example of the procedure.

Step S800: The production control unit 210 confirms whether or not it is a lottery trigger for the setting suggestive production. Specifically, the effect control unit 210 is a timing after a predetermined time has passed since the power was turned on (for example, after 2 hours, 4 hours, 6 hours, 8 hours, 10 hours, and 12 hours). If it corresponds to that timing, it is determined that it is the lottery opportunity for the setting suggestive effect. As a result of the confirmation, when it is the lottery trigger of the setting suggestion production (step S800: Yes), the production control unit 210 next executes step S802. On the other hand, if it is not the trigger for the setting suggestion production (step S800: No), the production control unit 210 returns to the processing of the calling source as it is.

Step S802: The effect control unit 210 executes a lottery vertical axis generation process. In this process, the effect control unit 210 is related to "current setting value", "presence or absence of setting change on the day", "setting value that has been used within the last 10 days", and "setting suggestion effect". The candidate data is narrowed down based on the current situation from among the plurality of candidate data of the vertical axis for lottery, each of which has a different combination of "internal state", and the vertical axis for lottery is generated. Here, the “lottery vertical axis” is a vertical axis of the lottery table, that is, a list (data row) of selection candidate data in the lottery table related to the setting suggestive effect.

The “presence/absence of setting change on the current day” and the “setting value that has been used within the last 10 days” are, specifically, the previous time stored in the SRAM 182 (setting history storage means) as setting history data. It is determined based on the update date information, the set value for the last 10 times, and the like.

The "internal state related to the execution of the setting suggestion effect" is a mode in which weighting is made different for a plurality of types of setting suggestion effect. As the type of setting suggestion production, for example, “setting change suggestion” that suggests that the setting was changed on the day, and high setting (setting 4 or more) was used within the last 10 days including the day There are “setting suggestion”, “current setting suggest”, etc. In the present embodiment, three types of modes (normal mode, morning one mode, special mode) in which weighting (which suggestion is more important) for these types of setting suggestive effects are different are provided.

It should be noted that the specifications of the setting history data, the internal state relating to the execution of the setting suggestive effect, and specific examples of the candidate data of the vertical axis for lottery will be described later in detail with reference to another drawing.

Step S804: The effect control unit 210 executes effect lottery processing. In this process, the production control unit 210 executes the production lottery of the setting suggestive production by using the lottery vertical axis generated in the previous step S802.

Step S806: The effect control unit 210 executes effect device setting processing. In this process, when the execution of the setting suggestion effect is determined as a result of the effect lottery executed in the previous step S804, the effect control unit 210 has already executed the content of the setting suggestion effect that is determined to be executed. After comparing the contents of the setting suggestion effect, the instruction to each effect device is given. Specifically, the effect control unit 210 displays the setting change icon BC or the high setting icon BH on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 via the display control unit 220, or the logo lamp 45 (glass) via the lamp control unit 224. The frame top lamp 46) is turned on in a predetermined display color.

The effect control unit 210 continues the setting suggestion effect that has already been executed until the power is cut off (until the power is turned on again). If the contents of the setting suggestion effect determined to be executed based on the result of the effect lottery include contents that are not better (lower priority) than the contents that have already been executed, the contents that are not good are ignored and set. Perform suggestive performance.

For example, when it is determined that only the high setting icon BH is displayed (the setting change icon BC is not displayed) by the effect lottery under the situation where the setting change icon BC is displayed, the high setting icon BH is set. While displaying, the setting change icon BC already displayed is also displayed as it is. Further, when the logo lamp 45 is lit in red and it is determined that the logo lamp 45 is lit in blue by the production lottery, blue is set to have a lower priority than red, Ignoring this decision, the logo lamp 45 continues to light in red.

When the above procedure is finished, the effect control unit 210 returns to the processing of the calling source.

[Specifications of setting history data]
FIG. 58 is a diagram for explaining the specifications of the setting history data. Of these, (A) in FIG. 58 is a table for explaining the structure (data item, size, number) of the setting history data, and (B) in FIG. 58 is the trigger for updating the setting history data and its update target. Is a table summarizing the data items that

As described above, when the setting is changed, the main control CPU 72 sends the setting related end designation command to the effect control device 124. If the setting-related end designation command is stored in the command buffer area of the RAM 130, the effect control unit 210 can determine that the setting has been changed or the current setting value from the contents (others). It may be judged based on the performance command).

As shown in the table of FIG. 58A, the setting history data is composed of three types of data items, “setting value”, “valid flag”, and “previous update date information”. Of these, the set value and the valid flag are each 1-byte data, and the information (history 1 to 10) for 10 times is stored by pairing these two data. The latest data is stored as history 1, and the oldest data (10th newest data) is stored as history 10. In addition, the history records 1 to 10 are updated one by one as old history records each time the latest data is added. Specifically, when the latest data is added, the history 10 is first discarded, the history 1 to 9 are slid to the history 2 to 10, and the latest data is stored as the history 1.

Also, the last update date information is 8-byte data, and information of “year”, “month”, “day”, “hour”, “minute”, “second”, and “day of the week” is extracted from this data. It is possible. Only one piece of the last update date information is stored as a whole, and is updated based on the date and time data of the RTC 184 when the latest data is added to the setting history data.

By the way, the “valid flag” is a flag indicating whether or not the set value stored in pair with this is valid. For example, when the manager of the hall changes the setting from "Setting 1" to "Setting 5" at the beginning, it is changed if "Thinking 5" is changed to "Setting 6" again. Although the history of two times regarding will be updated, "setting 5" temporarily set in the middle is a set value that is not actually used (no game is being played on the pachinko machine 1). is there. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order to facilitate the determination of whether or not the setting value has a history of use, when adding the latest setting value data to the history due to the setting change, “OFF (invalid)” is set as an initial value in the valid flag paired with this set value, and “ON (valid)” is set in the valid flag when the predetermined condition is satisfied. Then, when the vertical axis for lottery of the setting suggestion effect is generated, the setting value with the valid flag being “OFF” is ignored, and only the setting value with the valid flag being “ON” is reflected in the generation result. .. By performing such processing, it is possible to execute an appropriate setting suggestion effect based on the usage record of the set values in the pachinko machine 1.

Further, as shown in the table of FIG. 58B, all the data items of the setting history data are “when the power is turned on due to the setting change” and “when the power is turned on after the day after the last update date”. Will be updated. Specifically, as described above, after the pair of the set value and the valid flag is slid to the area that is older by one (as the history of the older number by one), the current set value and the initial value of the valid flag are “OFF”. Is set in the latest area (history 1), and the last update date information is updated with the current date and time. Note that the setting history data is not updated at all “when the power is turned on”. Therefore, even if the power is cut off during the day or the power is turned on again, these do not have any influence on the setting history data.

Further, in the setting history data, the valid flag is updated and “ON (valid)” is set when “100 rotations have been made after changing the setting (when the total number of fluctuations reaches 100 times)”. Therefore, the latest setting value will be reflected in the setting suggestion effect (the effect that suggests the setting value used within the last 10 days) of the setting performance suggestion executed thereafter.

In addition to the above-described data items, it is possible to store history information (for example, maintenance history such as RAM clear and various error detections) related to settings other than the above as the setting history data.

[Example 1 of updating setting history data]
FIG. 59 illustrates, as a first example of updating the setting history data, how the setting history data changes when the setting is changed in the morning of the day (before the opening of the game hall, the same applies hereinafter). FIG. Illustration of some data items of the setting history data is omitted. The valid flag “○” in the table indicates that “ON (valid)” is set, and the “X” indicates that it is “OFF (invalid)”. (The set value for which the valid flag is “OFF”) indicates that the setting suggestive effect is not reflected (the same applies to FIGS. 60 to 62).

FIG. 59A shows the setting history data immediately after the setting was changed in the morning of the day and the setting value was changed from “1” to “6” on the previous day. At this point, the setting value “1” for the previous day and the valid flag “ON” for that slide to the history 2, and the setting value “6” for the day and the valid flag “OFF” (initial value) for the same are set in the history 1. Has been done. Since the valid flag for the latest set value is “OFF”, the latest set value is not reflected in the setting suggestion effect of the setting performance suggestion executed in this state.

In FIG. 59(B): a game is played in the pachinko machine 1 after the setting is changed, and the setting history data is shown after reaching 100 rotations (after the total number of fluctuations reaches 100 times). As described above, the valid flag for the latest set value is updated when 100 revolutions are made after the setting is changed, so that the valid flag of history 1 is set to “ON” at this point. Therefore, the latest setting value is reflected in the setting suggestion effect of the setting performance suggestion executed thereafter.

[Example 2 of updating setting history data]
FIG. 60 illustrates, as a second example of updating the setting history data, how the setting history data changes when the setting is changed the night before (after the business hours of the game hall are closed, the same applies hereinafter). FIG.

FIG. 60A shows the setting history data immediately after the setting was changed the night before and the setting value was changed from “1” used on that day to “6”. The "current day" shown in this table is the day when the setting was changed. At this point, the set value "1" used for that day and the valid flag "ON" for that slide to the history 2, and the changed set value "6" and the valid flag "OFF" for that (initial value) Is set to history 1.

FIG. 60B shows the setting history data immediately after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on the next morning (also before the opening of the game hall). The "today" shown in this table is the day after the date when the setting is changed. As described above, when the power is turned on after the day after the previous update date, all the data items of the setting history data are updated. Therefore, at this point, the history records 1 to 9 in FIG. In the history 2 to 10 in B), the same value as the immediately preceding setting value (setting value of history 2) is set to "6" as the setting value of history 1. In addition, “OFF” is set as an initial value in the valid flag of history 1. Since the valid flag of the history 1 is “OFF”, the latest setting value is not reflected in the setting suggestion effect of the setting result suggestion executed in this state.

In FIG. 60C, a game is played in the pachinko machine 1 after the power is turned on, and the setting history data after reaching 100 rotations is shown. As described above, the valid flag for the latest set value is updated when 100 revolutions are made after the setting is changed, so that the valid flag of history 1 is set to “ON” at this point. Therefore, the latest setting value is reflected in the setting suggestion effect of the setting performance suggestion executed thereafter.

[Update example 3 of setting history data]
FIG. 61 is a diagram for explaining, as a third example of updating the setting history data, how the setting history data changes when the setting is changed the night before and 100 rotations are made on that day. is there.

In FIG. 61A, the setting history data is shown immediately after the setting was changed the night before and the setting value was changed from “1” used on that day to “6”. The "current day" shown in this table is the day when the setting was changed. At this point, the set value "1" used for that day and the valid flag "ON" for that slide to the history 2, and the changed set value "6" and the valid flag "OFF" for that (initial value) Is set to history 1.

In FIG. 61(B): a game is played in the pachinko machine 1 after the setting is changed, and the setting history data after reaching 100 rotations is shown. As described above, the valid flag for the latest set value is updated when 100 revolutions are made after the setting is changed, so that the valid flag of history 1 is set to “ON” at this point.

61(C): Shows the setting history data immediately after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on the next morning. The "today" shown in this table is the day after the date when the setting is changed. As described above, when the power is turned on the day after the previous update date, all the data items of the setting history data are updated. Therefore, at this time, the history records 1 to 9 in FIG. In the history 2 to 10 in C), the setting value of history 1 is set to the same value "6" as the immediately preceding setting value (setting value of history 2). In addition, “OFF” is set as an initial value in the valid flag of history 1. Since the valid flag of the history 1 is “OFF”, the latest setting value is not reflected in the setting suggestion effect of the setting result suggestion executed in this state.

In FIG. 61(D), a game is played in the pachinko machine 1 after the power is turned on, and the setting history data after reaching 100 rotations is shown. As described above, the valid flag for the latest set value is updated when 100 revolutions are made after the setting is changed, so that the valid flag of history 1 is set to “ON” at this point. Therefore, the latest setting value is reflected in the setting suggestion effect of the setting performance suggestion executed thereafter.

[Update example 4 of setting history data]
FIG. 62 shows, as a fourth example of updating the setting history data, how the setting history data when the game is not played for several days (when the pachinko machine 1 is not operated or the operation rate is extremely low) It is a figure explaining whether it changes to.

FIG. 62A shows the setting history data immediately after the setting was changed on the night 10 days before and the setting value was changed from “1” used on that day (10 days ago) to “3”. The "current day" shown in this table is the day when the setting was changed. At this point, the set value "1" used for that day and the valid flag "ON" for that slide to the history 2, and the changed set value "3" and the valid flag "OFF" for that (initial value) Is set to history 1.

FIG. 62B shows setting history data immediately after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on in the morning 9 days before (the morning after the day when the setting is changed). The "today" shown in this table is the day after the date when the setting is changed. As described above, when the power is turned on after the day after the previous update date, all the data items of the setting history data are updated. Therefore, at this time, the history records 1 to 9 in FIG. In the history 2 to 10 in B), the set value of the history 1 is set to the same value "3" as the previous set value (the set value of the history 2). In addition, “OFF” is set as an initial value in the valid flag of history 1. Since the valid flag of the history 1 is “OFF”, the latest setting value is not reflected in the setting suggestion effect of the setting result suggestion executed in this state.

Here, it is assumed that the pachinko machine 1 has not been operated or the operation rate is very low, and the total number of fluctuations per day has not reached 100 times for 10 days after the setting change.

FIG. 62C shows the setting history data immediately after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on in the morning of the day (the morning 10 days after the day when the setting is changed). The "today" shown in this table is 10 days after the date when the setting is changed. As described above, when the power is turned on the day after the previous update date, all the data items of the setting history data are updated. Therefore, at this point, the history of 9 days from 1 day ago to 9 days ago is shown in FIG. In the history 2 to 10 in C), the setting value of history 1 is set to the same value "3" as the immediately preceding setting value (setting value of history 2). In addition, “OFF” is set as an initial value in the valid flag of history 1.

In the pachinko machine 1, if there is no change from the operation status up to the previous day and the total number of fluctuations does not reach 100 times on that day as well, the valid flag is set to “10” in the history data (history 1 to 10). Since there is no setting value that is “ON”, history data is not reflected in the effect of setting change suggestion and setting result suggestion. On the other hand, when a game is played on the day and 100 revolutions are reached, the valid flag of the history 1 is set to "ON", so that the setting value "3" of the history 1 is the only setting suggesting setting performance suggestion. It will be reflected in the production of the production.

As described above, the setting history data is updated according to the setting change. When the setting is changed in the morning (for example, the case shown in FIGS. 59 and 62), the setting history data stores the latest 10 days. On the other hand, in other cases (for example, the cases shown in FIG. 60 and FIG. 61), since multiple histories of the same day occur, the setting history data has a number of days less than the last 10 days (for example, 60 and 9 days in the case shown in FIG. 61) are stored. In any case, in the present embodiment, the history data of the most recent 10 times (maximum 10 days including the current day) is stored as the setting history data. Then, among these history data, only the set value for which the valid flag is “ON” is reflected on the lottery vertical axis of the setting suggestive effect. Thereby, the setting suggestion effect of the appropriate setting achievement suggestion based on the use achievement of the set value in the pachinko machine 1 is executed.

Note that the content of the valid flag is reflected only in the setting suggestion effect of setting result suggestion. Therefore, setting suggestion of setting change suggestion (indication of setting change on the day) or current setting suggestion (indication of current setting value) can be executed regardless of the content of the valid flag. For example, when the setting is changed on the current day (the date of the last update date information matches the current day), even if the valid flag for the latest setting value is “OFF”, the setting suggestion effect of the setting change suggestion Can be performed.

[Lottery for setting suggestion production]
FIG. 63 is a diagram showing a lottery opportunity for setting suggestive effect.

In the present embodiment, a lottery opportunity for setting suggestive effect is provided seven times. The first lottery trigger is set immediately after the power is turned on, the second lottery trigger is set two hours after the power is turned on, and the third lottery trigger is set four hours after the power is turned on. Yes, the fourth lottery opportunity is set 6 hours after the power is turned on, the fifth lottery opportunity is set 8 hours after the power is turned on, and the sixth lottery opportunity is set 10 hours after the power is turned on. It is set later, and the seventh lottery opportunity is set 12 hours after the power is turned on.

Then, when the effect control unit 210 receives the demo effect command at each of the above timings, the effect lottery for the setting suggestion effect is executed. On the other hand, if the effect control unit 210 has not received the demonstration effect command at each timing described above, that is, if the game is being played, the effect lottery for that time is not executed. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, the production lottery of the setting suggestive production can be executed up to 7 times after the power is turned on, but depending on the situation of the game (for example, when the game is continued for a long time), the setting is performed. There is a possibility that the production lottery for suggestive production is never executed.

Even when the game is continued for a long time, the effect lottery is executed if the timing of the break on the way matches any of the above timings. Specifically, the player releases the handle unit 16 in the middle of the game, and the demonstration effect is executed when a predetermined time elapses in that state, but corresponds to any of the above timings during the execution of the demonstration effect. In this case, the effect lottery is executed, and depending on the result of the lottery, the setting suggestion effect is executed (the setting suggestion element appears) while the demonstration effect is being executed.

[Internal state related to execution of setting suggestion production]
FIG. 64 is a diagram illustrating an internal state related to execution of the setting suggestion effect.

The internal state related to the execution of the setting suggestion effect is set to different weights for a plurality of types of setting suggestion effect (setting change suggestion, setting performance suggestion, current setting suggestion) in consideration of the operating status of the pachinko machine 1 on the day. This is a mode (state), and in the present embodiment, there are provided three types of modes: “morning one mode”, “normal mode”, and “special mode”.

The morning one mode is a state in which the setting suggestion is made with a focus on the fact that the setting is changed rather than the setting itself. Therefore, although the current setting suggestion (indication of the current setting value) and the setting performance suggestion (indication of the setting value used within the last 10 days) are also performed, the frequency of appearance of these suggestions is set to be low. , The appearance frequency for the setting change suggestion (indication that the setting change was made on the day) is set higher.

The stay condition in the morning one mode is that the total number of fluctuations is 200 after the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 until the time saved by the first win is over, or after the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1. It is set to one of the times up to the number of times. Therefore, when either condition is satisfied, the mode is shifted to the normal mode.

In the normal mode, the current setting suggestion (the suggestion of the current setting value) and the setting performance suggestion (the suggestion of the setting value used within the last 10 days) are performed, but the appearance frequency and reliability are set to be low. Is in a state of being. In the normal mode as well, there is a case where a setting change is suggested (a suggestion that the setting is changed on the day), but the appearance frequency is set lower than that in the morning one mode.

The stay condition in the normal mode is set after leaving the morning one mode until the special mode transition condition is satisfied. Specifically, the total number of fluctuations reached 200 after the power saving was turned on to the pachinko machine 1 and after the time saved by the first win was over, or after the power was turned on to the pachinko machine 1. After that, the mode shifts to the normal mode. Then, after that, for example, (1) when the cumulative total of the number of normal games (the number of fluctuations in the low probability state) has passed 1,500, (2) when the number of big hits reaches 30, (3) in the normal mode If any of the cases where a lottery for each game is won during the stay is applied, the mode is shifted to the special mode.

It should be noted that the conditions for shifting to the special mode shown in (1) to (3) are given as an example until the user gets tired of them, and different conditions may be set. It is also possible to set a transition condition such that the morning one mode directly transits to the special mode without going through the normal mode.

The special mode suggests the current setting (suggestion of the current setting value) and suggests the setting result (suggestion of the setting value used within the last 10 days), but its appearance frequency and reliability are higher than in the normal mode. It has been set. In the special mode as well, there is a case where a setting change suggestion (a suggestion that the setting change has been made on the day) is made, but the appearance frequency thereof is set lower than that in the morning one mode.

In this way, the pachinko machine 1 in operation always corresponds to one of the three types of the morning mode, the normal mode, and the special mode, and the content of the setting suggestion effect changes depending on the mode.

In addition to the above three types of modes, further modes may be provided. In addition, in the normal mode and the special mode, it may be set so that a new setting change suggestion (different from the continuation of the setting change suggestion that appeared in the morning one mode) does not appear.

[Configuration example of candidate data for vertical axis for lottery]
65 to 67 are diagrams showing a configuration example of candidate data for the vertical axis for lottery (vertical axis of the lottery table) related to the setting suggestive effect. Of these, the vertical axis numbers 0 to 17 shown in FIG. 65 are candidate data that can form the lottery vertical axis when staying in the normal mode, and the vertical axis numbers 18 to 35 shown in FIG. , The candidate data that can form the lottery vertical axis when staying in the morning one mode, and the vertical axis numbers 36 to 53 shown in FIG. 67 indicate the lottery vertical axis when staying in the special mode. It is candidate data that can be configured.

On the horizontal axis of each candidate data, data items of “vertical axis number”, “mode”, “current day setting”, “presence/absence of change”, and “setting history” are defined. Of these, "mode" indicates the mode that is staying when the vertical axis for lottery is generated, "current day setting" indicates the setting value for the current day, and "presence or absence of change" indicates the setting change on the day “Setting history” indicates a setting value that has been used within the last 10 days (more accurately, a setting value whose valid flag is “ON” in the setting history data). There is.

As can be seen from FIGS. 65 to 67, the contents of each of these candidate data are divided into a predetermined range of the contents of the data items of “mode”, “current day setting”, “presence/absence of change”, and “setting history”, and all of them. It is configured by enumerating the combinations of. In the lottery vertical axis generation process (step S802 in FIG. 57), candidate data is narrowed down from the 54 lines of candidate data based on the situation at the time of executing the process.

For example, the stay mode at the time of executing the lottery vertical axis generation processing is “normal mode”, the set value on the day is “3”, the setting change on the day is “present”, and the last 10 days If the set values that have been used within are “1”, “3”, and “5”, the candidate data is narrowed down to two rows with vertical axis numbers “9” and “10”. Further, the stay mode at the time of executing the lottery vertical axis generation processing is “special mode”, the setting value on the day is “6”, and the setting change on the day is “none”, and the last 10 days When the set values that have been used within are “1”, “4”, and “6”, the candidate data is narrowed down to three rows with vertical axis numbers “48” to “50”.

It should be noted that these candidate data include a part of candidate data due to an impossible combination because of the history of being configured by listing all combinations of each data item. However, since such candidate data is not included in the generation result (generated lottery vertical axis) by the lottery vertical axis generation processing under any circumstances, no problem occurs.

By the way, on the horizontal axis of each candidate data, various data items are defined in addition to the above-mentioned "vertical axis number", "mode", "current day setting", "change or not", and "setting history". , "Logo lamp lighting color", "Setting change icon presence/absence", "High setting icon presence/absence" are also included therein. Of these, the "logo lamp lighting color" indicates the lighting color of the logo lamp 45, and any one of "normal", "blue", "red", and "rainbow" is set in the data. The “presence or absence of setting change icon” indicates whether or not the setting change icon BC is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and either “present” or “absent” is set in the data. The "presence/absence of high setting icon" indicates whether or not the setting change icon BC is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and either "present" or "absent" is set in the data. A description of what data is specifically set for each candidate data is omitted.

According to the flow as described above, first, in the lottery vertical axis generation process (step S802 in FIG. 57), the candidate data of the lottery vertical axis is narrowed down, and the lottery vertical corresponding to the situation at that time is selected. The axis is generated. Next, in the production lottery process (step S804 in FIG. 57), the production lottery of the setting suggestive production is executed using the generated vertical axis for lottery.

A plurality of types of lottery tables for effect lottery are prepared in which different distribution values (selection ratios) are defined, and different lottery tables are used according to lottery triggers. Specifically, in the lottery table used for the lottery trigger in which the elapsed time after the power is turned on is longer, the distribution value is set so that the setting suggestion effect is more easily executed. Then, as a result of the production lottery, if any of the candidate data is selected, the “logo lamp lighting color”, “setting change icon presence/absence”, and “high setting icon presence/absence” set in the selected candidate data are selected. Based on the content, in the production device setting process (step S806 in FIG. 57), the content of the setting suggestion production that has already been executed and the content determined to be executed by the production lottery are taken into consideration, and necessary for each production device. Instructions are given. As a result, the setting suggestion effect that does not fall is executed.

The vertical axis for lottery and the lottery table may be configured so that the predetermined suggestive element does not appear in each of the morning one mode, the normal mode, and the special mode. For example, when the setting change suggestion does not appear in the normal mode and the special mode, the distribution value (selection) for the “setting change icon” and the “logo lamp blue lighting” in the normal mode and the special mode in the lottery table thus configured is selected. By setting the ratio) to “0”, it is possible to perform control in which no setting change is suggested in these modes.

[Direction pattern of setting suggestion]
FIG. 68 is a diagram showing an example of the effect pattern of the setting suggestion effect.
In this embodiment, five types of effect patterns are prepared. The contents will be described below for each effect pattern.

First, the "high setting icon display pattern" is an effect pattern of setting performance suggesting that the highest setting (setting 6) has been used within the last 10 days including the current day. In this effect pattern, a high setting icon BH consisting of an image decorated with a crown and two axes is used on the upper part of the plate on which the letters "SUPER/HERO" are written as a setting suggestion element. Specifically, the high setting icon BH is displayed in the upper right portion of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 as in the example of the effect shown in (C) to FIG. 44 (E) in FIG. 43 (second setting suggesting effect). ). Note that the “high setting icon display pattern” may be an effect pattern that suggests a high setting (for example, setting 5 or higher) usage record, instead of the highest setting (setting 6) usage record.

Next, the “setting change icon display pattern” is a setting change suggestion effect pattern that suggests that the setting has been changed on the day. In this effect pattern, a setting change icon BC including an image showing a worker wearing a towel headband is used as a setting suggestion element. Specifically, the setting change icon BC is displayed in the upper right part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 as in the effect examples shown in FIG. 42(B), FIG. 43(C), and FIG. 44(E). (1st setting suggestion effect).

Further, the "logo lamp red lighting pattern" is a setting pattern suggesting production pattern that suggests that the high setting (setting 4 or more) has been used within the last 10 days including the current day. In this effect pattern, lighting of the logo lamp 45 in red is used as a setting suggestion element. Specifically, the logo lamp 45 is turned on in red like the example of the effect shown in (D) of FIG. 43 and (E) of FIG. 44 (second setting suggesting effect).

The "logo lamp blue lighting pattern" is a setting change suggesting effect pattern that suggests that the setting has been changed on the day. In this effect pattern, lighting of the logo lamp 45 in blue is used as a setting suggestion element. Specifically, like the effect example shown in FIG. 42A, the logo lamp 45 is lit in blue (first setting suggestion effect).

The “logo lamp rainbow lighting pattern” is an effect pattern of the current setting suggesting that the highest setting (setting 6) is set on the day. In this effect pattern, the rainbow lighting of the logo lamp 45 is used as a setting suggestion element. Specifically, as in the example of the effect shown in (F) of FIG. 44, the logo lamp 45 is lit in a rainbow color (second setting suggestion effect). The "logo lamp rainbow lighting pattern" may be replaced with the highest setting (setting 6) and may be a production pattern that suggests a high setting (for example, setting 5 or higher).

These effect patterns may be selected independently, or the setting suggestion effect may be executed in a state where a plurality of types are simultaneously selected and a plurality of setting suggestion elements are combined.

Regarding the display of the icon, once the effect pattern is selected, the display is continuously performed until the pachinko machine 1 is powered off thereafter (until the power is turned on again). For example, when the setting change icon display pattern is selected by the effect lottery at a certain lottery opportunity, the setting change icon BC is displayed. Then, even if the setting change icon display pattern is not selected by the effect drawing in the subsequent lottery trigger, the display of the setting change icon BC is continued.

Further, each lighting color of the logo lamp 45 is provided with a priority such that "normal" is the lowest and higher priority is set in the order of "blue", "red", and "rainbow". Therefore, the current lighting color of the logo lamp 45 is compared with the lighting color of the effect pattern selected by the effect lottery, and if the current lighting color has a higher priority, the logo lamp 45 is turned on by the current lighting color. Is continued. On the other hand, when the current lighting color has a lower priority, the logo lamp 45 is lit in the lighting color according to the effect pattern selected by the effect lottery.

In addition to the above-mentioned effect patterns, further effect patterns may be provided. For example, a plurality of effect patterns may be provided for each of the “high setting icon display pattern” and the “setting change icon display pattern”.

Moreover, the execution of the effect pattern by the “logo lamp red lighting pattern”, the “logo lamp blue lighting pattern”, and the “logo lamp rainbow lighting pattern” is performed in place of the logo lamp 45 or together with the logo lamp 45, other glass frame decoration lamps 46, 48, It may be executed by turning on 50 and 52.

[Processing when the variable winning device is activated]
FIG. 69 is a flow chart showing a configuration example of processing when the variable winning device is operated. The variable winning device operating process is a subroutine of an execution selection process (step S902), a variable winning device operating pre-process (step S904), a variable winning device operating process (step S906), and a variable winning device operating post process (step S908). This is a configuration including a (program module) group. Here, first, the basic flow of the process at the time of operating the variable winning device will be described along with each process.

Step S902: In the execution selection process, the effect control unit 210 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any one of steps S904 to S908) from the “jump table”. For example, the effect control unit 210 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the variable winning device operating process as the stack destination address in the stack pointer.

Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the process performed so far. For example, in a situation where the variable winning device operation pre-processing has not been started yet, the effect control unit 210 selects the variable winning device operation pre-processing (step S904) as the next jump destination. If the variable winning device operation pre-processing has already been completed, the effect control unit 210 selects the variable winning device operating process (step S906) as the next jump destination. Further, if the process during the operation of the variable winning device is completed, the effect control unit 210 selects the process after the operation of the variable winning device (step S908) as the next jump destination.

Step S904: In the variable winning device operation pre-process, the effect control unit 210 executes a process of selecting the content of the effect to be executed during the big hit game or the small hit game. For example, in the case of winning in the "12 round normal pattern", a process of selecting an effect in which the ally character is defeated by the enemy character is executed. Further, in the case of winning in “12 round probability variation symbols 1 and 2,” processing for selecting an effect in which the teammate character wins over the enemy character is executed. Furthermore, in the case of winning in "6 round probability variation symbols 1 and 2," processing for selecting a normal bonus effect is executed. Furthermore, in the case of winning the "16 round probability variation pattern", a process of selecting a special bonus effect is executed.

Step S906: In the variable winning device operation process, the effect control unit 210 generates control information for instructing the display control unit 220 as necessary. For example, when performing the effect using the operation unit 60 during execution of the jackpot effect, the input control unit 228 detects whether or not the player operates the operation unit 60, and the effect content (operation trigger effect) corresponding to the result is detected. , Control information such as continuous hit effect, linked operation effect, etc.) is instructed to the display control unit 220. Further, in the process during the operation of the variable winning device, when the probability variation area passing command is received during the big hit game, an effect indicating that a V winning has occurred (an effect shown in (J) in FIG. 47) is selected. While executing the process, when the probability variation area passing command is not received during the big hit game, a process of selecting an effect indicating that a V winning has not occurred (an effect shown in (N) in FIG. 48) To execute.

Step S908: In the variable winning device operation post-processing, the effect control unit 210 executes an effect of transmitting the destination mode to the player during the end time of the variable winning device. For example, the effect control unit 210 executes the coast mode rush effect or the firework rush rush effect depending on whether or not the winning symbol or the probability variation area has passed. Specifically, when the probability variation area passing command is received during the big hit game, a process for selecting an effect indicating that the fireworks rush is to be entered (an effect shown in (K) in FIG. 47) is executed, and the big hit is performed. When the probability variation area passage command is not received during the game, a process of selecting an effect indicating that the player enters the coast mode (an effect shown in (G) in FIG. 46) is executed.
When the above process is completed, the effect control unit 210 returns to the effect symbol management process (FIG. 55).

As explained above, according to the above-mentioned embodiment, there are the following effects.
(1) According to the present embodiment, since the history data related to the set values of the latest 10 times (up to 10 days including the current day) is stored as the setting history data, the current setting suggestion indicating the current set value is suggested. In addition, it is possible to execute the setting suggestion effect of the setting performance suggestion that suggests that the predetermined set value has been used within the last 10 days.

(2) According to the present embodiment, since the last update date information is also stored as the setting history data, the setting suggesting effect of the setting change suggesting that the setting is changed on the day is executed based on this information. can do.

(3) According to the present embodiment, the valid flag is set as a pair with the set value in the history data for the last 10 times stored as the set history data, and the total number of fluctuations in the set value is the predetermined number of times. When it reaches (for example, 100 times), the valid flag is updated to "ON (valid)", while when it does not reach the predetermined number, the valid flag remains "OFF (invalid)" with the initial value. Therefore, by ignoring the setting value of the valid flag being “OFF” and reflecting only the setting value of the valid flag being “ON”, the setting suggestion of the setting performance suggestion based on the usage history of the setting value in the pachinko machine 1 is suggested. The production can be executed.

(4) According to the present embodiment, a plurality of types of modes (normal mode, morning one mode, special mode) are provided in relation to the setting suggestion effect, and a plurality of setting suggestion effects executed according to the mode are provided. Not only the weighting for types (setting change suggestion, setting performance suggestion, current setting suggestion, etc.) is different, but the appearance frequency and reliability of setting suggestion elements are also different, making it easy to decipher the content suggested by each setting suggestion element. Therefore, it is possible to give the player the pleasure of playing the game while inferring the suggested contents, and to attract the player to the game.

(5) According to the present embodiment, since the setting suggestion effect appears during the execution of the demonstration effect, the setting suggestion effect can be visually recognized even without playing a game. As a result, it is possible to give the player motivation to select a table to play after comparing a large number of tables, increase the number of customers in a time period when the number of customers is small, and increase the operation rate of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to contribute to the improvement.

(6) According to the present embodiment, once the setting suggestion element (high setting icon BH, setting change icon BC, lighting of the logo lamp 45 in a non-normal color) appears, it appears until the pachinko machine 1 is powered off. While continuing, there is a possibility that the composition of the setting suggestion element will change (change in the lighting color of the logo lamp 45 or the appearance of further setting suggestion element) due to the subsequent production lottery. When the element has already appeared, it is possible to give the player the motivation to continue the game until a change occurs in the configuration, and it is possible to contribute to the improvement of the operation rate of the pachinko machine 1. Become.

The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment and can be variously modified and implemented. The mode of performance and various numerical values mentioned in the embodiment are merely examples, and the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned contents.

In the above-described embodiment, each setting suggestion effect of setting change suggestion, setting result suggestion, and current setting suggestion is made to appear during the execution of the demonstration effect, but during the execution of other effects (for example, during the variable effect effect). (During execution of the notice effect executed in step 2, the effect during effect, the ending effect during effect, the time saving end effect executed at the end of the time saving state). At this time, the setting suggestion of setting change suggestion, setting performance suggestion, and current setting suggestion are also produced depending on the type of other effects that cause the setting suggestion effect to appear (announcement effect, effect during effect, effect end effect, etc.). The selection ratio of may be different.

In the above-described embodiment, the setting suggestion effect that does not fall is executed in consideration of the content (priority) of the setting suggestion effect that has already been executed and the content (priority) determined by the effect lottery. However, instead of this, it is also possible to execute the setting suggestion effect only in accordance with the content determined by the effect lottery.

In the above-described embodiment, when the vertical axis for lottery is generated, the presence or absence of the setting change on the day is taken into consideration. However, whether or not the setting is changed on the day is stored as a part of the setting history data. May be determined based on whether or not the set value of history 1 (the set value of the current day) and the set value of history 2 are different, or the set value of the history 1 (the set value of the current day) The determination may be made based on whether or not the history data whose valid flag is “ON” after history 2 is different from the latest set value.

In the above-described embodiment, when the vertical axis for lottery is generated, the setting value of the current day is taken into consideration, but the setting value of the current day is the latest setting value stored as a part of the setting history data ( It may be determined based on the setting value of history 1), or the current setting value obtained from the contents of the effect command (setting related end designation command etc.) including the current setting value transmitted from the main control CPU72. May be held in a predetermined area of the RAM 130, and the determination may be made based on the information held in the RAM 130 without using the setting history data.

In the above-described embodiment, an example in which the present invention is applied to a gaming machine having a probability variation area has been described, but the present invention may be applied to a gaming machine having no probability variation area. The present invention can also be applied to a so-called simultaneous turning machine.

The images given in the other performance examples are merely examples, and these can be appropriately modified. Further, the structure of the pachinko machine 1, the board surface configuration, specific numerical values and the like are preferable examples including those shown in the drawings, and it goes without saying that these can be appropriately modified.

1 Pachinko machine 8 game board unit 8a game area 16 handle unit 20 start gate 28 variable start winning device 33 normal symbol display device 33a normal symbol working memory lamp 34 first special symbol display device 35 second special symbol display device 34a first special Design working memory lamp 35a Second special design working memory lamp 38 Game status display device 42 Liquid crystal display 45 Logo lamp 70 Main control device 72 Main control CPU
76 RAM
124 Production control device 126 Production control CPU
130 RAM
210 Production control unit 220 Display control unit 224 Lamp control unit BC setting change icon BH high setting icon

Claims (3)

Setting changing means capable of changing the setting relating to the winning probability of a predetermined lottery executed during the game to one of a plurality of types,
A first setting suggestion effect executing means capable of executing a first setting suggestion effect suggesting the contents related to the setting;
Second setting suggestion effect executing means capable of executing a second setting suggestion effect that suggests a content different from the first setting suggestion effect with respect to the setting,
The execution of the first setting suggesting effect and the second setting suggesting effect is controlled, and the first setting suggesting effect and the second state different from the first state, which is a predetermined state related to the game, and the second state. A game machine characterized by comprising setting suggestion effect execution control means for changing the execution frequency of the second setting suggestion effect. In the gaming machine according to claim 1,
Further comprising a setting history storage means for storing a history relating to the change of the setting,
The first setting suggestion production execution means,
It is possible to perform an effect that suggests that the settings have been changed,
The second setting suggestion effect execution means,
It is possible to execute a performance that suggests the setting,
The setting suggestion production execution control means,
A game machine characterized by using the history for controlling execution of at least the first setting suggestion effect. In the gaming machine according to claim 2,
The second setting suggestion effect execution means,
An amusement machine characterized by being able to further execute an effect suggesting that a predetermined setting has been used within a predetermined period.